TS Inter 1st Year Maths 1A Matrices Important Questions Very Short Answer Type

Students must practice these Maths 1A Important Questions TS Inter 1st Year Maths 1A Matrices Important Questions Very Short Answer Type to help strengthen their preparations for exams.

TS Inter 1st Year Maths 1A Matrices Important Questions Very Short Answer Type

Question 1.
If A = \(\left[\begin{array}{ll}
1 & 2 \\
3 & 4
\end{array}\right]\), B = \(\left[\begin{array}{ll}
3 & 8 \\
7 & 2
\end{array}\right]\) and 2X + A = B, then find X. [Mar. 15 (AP); Mar. 13, 11; May 12]
Answer:
TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Matrices Important Questions Very Short Answer Type 1

TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Matrices Important Questions Very Short Answer Type

If A = \(\left[\begin{array}{ccc}
3 & 2 & -1 \\
2 & -2 & 0 \\
1 & 3 & 1
\end{array}\right]\), B = \(\left[\begin{array}{ccc}
-3 & -1 & 0 \\
2 & 1 & 3 \\
4 & -1 & 2
\end{array}\right]\) and X = A + B then find X. [Mar. 17 (TS)]
Answer:
\(\left[\begin{array}{ccc}
0 & 1 & -1 \\
4 & -1 & 3 \\
5 & 2 & 3
\end{array}\right]\)

Question 2.
If \(\left[\begin{array}{cc}
x-3 & 2 y-8 \\
z+2 & 6
\end{array}\right]\) = \(\left[\begin{array}{cc}
5 & 2 \\
-2 & a-4
\end{array}\right]\), then find the values of x, y, z and a. [May 14, 06 Mar. 19(AP)]
Answer:
Given \(\left[\begin{array}{cc}
x-3 & 2 y-8 \\
z+2 & 6
\end{array}\right]\) = \(\left[\begin{array}{cc}
5 & 2 \\
-2 & a-4
\end{array}\right]\)
From the equality of matrices,
x – 3 = 5
⇒ x = 8
2y – 8 = 2
2y = 10
y=5
z + 2 = – 2
z = – 4
a – 4 = 6
a = 10
∴ x = 8, y = 5, z = – 4, a = 10

If \(\left[\begin{array}{ccc}
x-1 & 2 & 5-y \\
0 & z-1 & 7 \\
1 & 0 & a-5
\end{array}\right]\) = \(\left[\begin{array}{lll}
1 & 2 & 3 \\
0 & 4 & 7 \\
1 & 0 & 0
\end{array}\right]\) then find the values of x, y, z and ‘a’.
Answer:
2, 2, 5, 5

If \(\left[\begin{array}{ccc}
x-1 & 2 & y-5 \\
z & 0 & 2 \\
1 & -1 & 1+a
\end{array}\right]\) = \(\left[\begin{array}{ccc}
1-x & 2 & -y \\
2 & 0 & 2 \\
1 & -1 & 1
\end{array}\right]\) then find the values of x, y, z and ‘a’.
Answer:
1, \(\frac{5}{2}\), 2, 0

TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Matrices Important Questions Very Short Answer Type

Question 3.
Find the trace of \(\left[\begin{array}{rrr}
1 & 3 & -5 \\
2 & -1 & 5 \\
2 & 0 & 1
\end{array}\right]\).
Answer:
Let A = \(\left[\begin{array}{rrr}
1 & 3 & -5 \\
2 & -1 & 5 \\
2 & 0 & 1
\end{array}\right]\)
∴ Tra A = 1 – 1 + 1 = 1
The elements of the principal diagonal = 1, – 1, 1

Fin the area of A if A = \(\left[\begin{array}{ccc}
1 & 2 & -1 / 2 \\
0 & -1 & 2 \\
-1 / 2 & 2 & 1
\end{array}\right]\)
Answer:
1

Question 4.
If A = \(\left[\begin{array}{lll}
1 & 2 & 3 \\
3 & 2 & 1
\end{array}\right]\) and B = \(\left[\begin{array}{lll}
3 & 2 & 1 \\
1 & 2 & 3
\end{array}\right]\), find 3B – 2A. [Mar, 19 (TS); Mar. 12]
Answer:
TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Matrices Important Questions Very Short Answer Type 2

If A = \(\left[\begin{array}{ccc}
0 & 1 & 2 \\
2 & 3 & 4 \\
4 & 5 & -6
\end{array}\right]\) and B = \(\left[\begin{array}{ccc}
-1 & 2 & 3 \\
0 & 1 & 0 \\
0 & 0 & -1
\end{array}\right]\) find B – A and 4A – 5B
Answer:
\(\left[\begin{array}{ccc}
-1 & 1 & 1 \\
-2 & -2 & -4 \\
-4 & -5 & -5
\end{array}\right],\left[\begin{array}{ccc}
5 & -6 & -7 \\
8 & 7 & 16 \\
16 & 20 & -19
\end{array}\right]\)

TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Matrices Important Questions Very Short Answer Type

If A = \(\left[\begin{array}{lll}
0 & 1 & 2 \\
2 & 3 & 4 \\
4 & 5 & 6
\end{array}\right]\) and B = \(\left[\begin{array}{ccc}
1 & -2 & 0 \\
0 & 1 & -1 \\
-1 & 0 & 3
\end{array}\right]\) find A – B and 4B – 3A
Answer:
\(\left[\begin{array}{ccc}
-1 & 3 & 2 \\
2 & 2 & 5 \\
5 & 5 & 3
\end{array}\right],\left[\begin{array}{ccc}
4 & -11 & -6 \\
-6 & -5 & -16 \\
-16 & -15 & -6
\end{array}\right]\)

Question 5.
If A = \(\left[\begin{array}{rrr}
1 & -2 & 3 \\
2 & 3 & -1 \\
-3 & 1 & 2
\end{array}\right]\) and B = \(\left[\begin{array}{lll}
1 & 0 & 2 \\
0 & 1 & 2 \\
1 & 2 & 0
\end{array}\right]\) then examine whether A and B commute with respect to multiplication of matrices. [Nov, 98]
Answer:
Given A = \(\left[\begin{array}{rrr}
1 & -2 & 3 \\
2 & 3 & -1 \\
-3 & 1 & 2
\end{array}\right]\), B = \(\left[\begin{array}{lll}
1 & 0 & 2 \\
0 & 1 & 2 \\
1 & 2 & 0
\end{array}\right]\)
Both A and B are square matrices of order 3.
Hence both AB and BA are defined and are matrices of order 3.
TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Matrices Important Questions Very Short Answer Type 3
which shows that AB ≠ BA
Therefore A and B do not commute with respect to multiplication of matrices.

TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Matrices Important Questions Very Short Answer Type

If A = \(\left[\begin{array}{rrr}
1 & -2 & 3 \\
-4 & 2 & 5
\end{array}\right]\) and B = \(\left[\begin{array}{ll}
2 & 3 \\
4 & 5 \\
2 & 1
\end{array}\right]\) do AB and BA exist ? If they exist find them. Do A and B commute with respect to multiplication.
Answer:
\(\left[\begin{array}{cc}
0 & -4 \\
10 & 3
\end{array}\right]\), \(\left[\begin{array}{ccc}
-10 & 2 & 21 \\
-16 & 2 & 37 \\
-2 & -2 & 11
\end{array}\right]\) & AB ≠BA

Question 6.
If A = \(\left[\begin{array}{cc}
\mathbf{i} & 0 \\
0 & -\mathbf{i}
\end{array}\right]\), then show that A2 = – 1. [Mar. 16 (AP), 08]
Answer:
TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Matrices Important Questions Very Short Answer Type 4

Find A2 where A = \(\left[\begin{array}{cc}
4 & 2 \\
-1 & 1
\end{array}\right]\).
Answer:
\(\left[\begin{array}{rr}
14 & 10 \\
-5 & -1
\end{array}\right]\)

If A = \(\left[\begin{array}{ll}
\mathbf{i} & \mathbf{0} \\
\mathbf{0} & \mathbf{i}
\end{array}\right]\), find A2.
Answer:
\(\left[\begin{array}{cc}
-1 & 0 \\
0 & -1
\end{array}\right]\)

TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Matrices Important Questions Very Short Answer Type

Question 7.
Find \(\left[\begin{array}{ccc}
\mathbf{0} & \mathbf{c} & -\mathbf{b} \\
-\mathbf{c} & \mathbf{0} & \mathbf{a} \\
\mathbf{b} & -\mathbf{a} & \mathbf{0}
\end{array}\right]\) \(\left[\begin{array}{lll}
\mathbf{a}^2 & \mathbf{a b} & \mathbf{a c} \\
\mathbf{a b} & \mathbf{b}^2 & \mathbf{b c} \\
\mathbf{a c} & \mathbf{b c} & \mathbf{c}^2
\end{array}\right]\) [Mar. 96; May 91]
Answer:
Let A = \(\left[\begin{array}{ccc}
\mathbf{0} & \mathbf{c} & -\mathbf{b} \\
-\mathbf{c} & \mathbf{0} & \mathbf{a} \\
\mathbf{b} & -\mathbf{a} & \mathbf{0}
\end{array}\right]\), B = \(\left[\begin{array}{lll}
\mathbf{a}^2 & \mathbf{a b} & \mathbf{a c} \\
\mathbf{a b} & \mathbf{b}^2 & \mathbf{b c} \\
\mathbf{a c} & \mathbf{b c} & \mathbf{c}^2
\end{array}\right]\)
The order of matrix, A is 3 × 3
The order of matrix, B is 3 × 3
The no. of columns in A = The no. of rows in B.
∴ AB is defined.
TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Matrices Important Questions Very Short Answer Type 5

Question 8.
If A = \(\left[\begin{array}{cc}
2 & 4 \\
-1 & k
\end{array}\right]\) and A2 = 0, then find the value of k. [Mar. 17 (AP), 14, 05, May. 11, Mar. 08(TS)]
Answer:
TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Matrices Important Questions Very Short Answer Type 6
From equality of matrices, – 2 – k = 0 ⇒ k = – 2

TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Matrices Important Questions Very Short Answer Type

Question 9.
If A = \(\left[\begin{array}{lll}
3 & 0 & 0 \\
0 & 3 & 0 \\
0 & 0 & 3
\end{array}\right]\) then find A4. [May 01]
Answer:
TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Matrices Important Questions Very Short Answer Type 7

If A = \(\left[\begin{array}{ccc}
1 & 1 & 3 \\
5 & 2 & 6 \\
-2 & -1 & -3
\end{array}\right]\) then find A3.
Answer:
\(\left[\begin{array}{lll}
0 & 0 & 0 \\
0 & 0 & 0 \\
0 & 0 & 0
\end{array}\right]\)

Question 10.
If A = \(\left[\begin{array}{lll}
1 & 4 & 7 \\
2 & 5 & 8
\end{array}\right]\) and B = \(\left[\begin{array}{rrr}
-3 & 4 & 0 \\
4 & -2 & -1
\end{array}\right]\), then show that (A + B)’ = A’ + B’ [May. 09]
Answer:
TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Matrices Important Questions Very Short Answer Type 8

TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Matrices Important Questions Very Short Answer Type

Question 11.
If A = \(\left[\begin{array}{rrr}
-2 & 1 & 0 \\
3 & 4 & -5
\end{array}\right]\) and B = \(\left[\begin{array}{cc}
1 & 2 \\
4 & 3 \\
-1 & 5
\end{array}\right]\), then find A + B’. [May. 08]
Answer:
TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Matrices Important Questions Very Short Answer Type 9

Question 12.
If A = \(\left[\begin{array}{ccc}
2 & -1 & 2 \\
1 & 3 & -4
\end{array}\right]\) and B = \(\left[\begin{array}{cc}
1 & -2 \\
-3 & 0 \\
5 & 4
\end{array}\right]\), then verify that (AB)’ = B’A’ [Mar. 13]
Answer:
TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Matrices Important Questions Very Short Answer Type 10

TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Matrices Important Questions Very Short Answer Type

Question 13.
If A = \(\left[\begin{array}{ccc}
2 & 0 & 1 \\
-1 & 1 & 5
\end{array}\right]\) and B = \(\left[\begin{array}{ccc}
-1 & 1 & 0 \\
0 & 1 & -2
\end{array}\right]\), then find (AB)’. [Mar. 19 (TS); May. 12]
Answer:
TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Matrices Important Questions Very Short Answer Type 11

Question 14.
If A = \(\left[\begin{array}{rr}
-2 & 1 \\
5 & 0 \\
-1 & 4
\end{array}\right]\) and B = \(\left[\begin{array}{rrr}
-2 & 3 & 1 \\
4 & 0 & 2
\end{array}\right]\) then find 2A + B’ and 3B’ – A. [Mar. 10]
Answer:
TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Matrices Important Questions Very Short Answer Type 12

TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Matrices Important Questions Very Short Answer Type

Question 15.
If A = \(\left[\begin{array}{rr}
2 & -4 \\
-5 & 3
\end{array}\right]\), then find A + A’ and AA’ [May 15 (AP); May 07, 02]
Answer:
TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Matrices Important Questions Very Short Answer Type 13

If A = \(\left[\begin{array}{cc}
-1 & 2 \\
0 & 1
\end{array}\right]\) then find AA’. Do A and A’ commute with respect to multiplication of matrices ? [Mar. 17(TS)]
Answer:
AA’ = \(\left[\begin{array}{ll}
5 & 2 \\
2 & 1
\end{array}\right]\), A’A = \(\left[\begin{array}{cc}
1 & -2 \\
-2 & 5
\end{array}\right]\); AA’ ≠ A’A

Question 16.
If A = \(\left[\begin{array}{ccc}
0 & 4 & -2 \\
-4 & 0 & 8 \\
2 & -8 & x
\end{array}\right]\) is a skew symmetric matrix, find the value of x. [Mar. 08]
Answer:
TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Matrices Important Questions Very Short Answer Type 14

Question 17.
If A = \(\left[\begin{array}{rrr}
-1 & 2 & 3 \\
2 & 5 & 6 \\
3 & x & 7
\end{array}\right]\) is a symmetric matrix, then find x. [Mar. 16 (AP), 05, 03, May. 15 (TS)]
Answer:
TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Matrices Important Questions Very Short Answer Type 15
From equality of matrices, x = 6.

TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Matrices Important Questions Very Short Answer Type

Question 18.
If A = \(\left[\begin{array}{rrr}
0 & 2 & 1 \\
-2 & 0 & -2 \\
-1 & x & 0
\end{array}\right]\) is a skew symmetric matrix, then find x. [May. 14, 13, 11]
Answer:
A matrix A is said to be skew symmetric if,
TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Matrices Important Questions Very Short Answer Type 16
From the equality of matrices, x = 2.
∴ x = 2

Question 19.
Is \(\left[\begin{array}{ccc}
0 & 1 & 4 \\
-1 & 0 & 7 \\
-4 & -7 & 0
\end{array}\right]\) symmetric or skew symmetric? [Mar. 09]
Answer:
TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Matrices Important Questions Very Short Answer Type 17
∴ A is a skew symmetric matrix since AT = – A.

Question 20.
If A = \(\left[\begin{array}{cc}
\cos \alpha & \sin \alpha \\
-\sin \alpha & \cos \alpha
\end{array}\right]\), show that AA’ = A’A = I. [Mar. 07]
Answer:
TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Matrices Important Questions Very Short Answer Type 18

TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Matrices Important Questions Very Short Answer Type

Question 21.
If ω is complex (non real) cube root of 1, then show that \(\left|\begin{array}{ccc}
1 & \omega & \omega^2 \\
\omega & \omega^2 & 1 \\
\omega^2 & 1 & \omega
\end{array}\right|\) = 0 [Mar. 14, 11; May. 92]
Answer:
1, ω, ω2 are the cube roots of unity.
Then, 1 + ω + ω2 = 0, ω3 = 1.
TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Matrices Important Questions Very Short Answer Type 19

Question 22.
Find the determinant of the matrix. [May. 95]
\(\left[\begin{array}{lll}
0 & 1 & 1 \\
1 & 0 & 1 \\
1 & 1 & 0
\end{array}\right]\)
Answer:
Let A = \(\left[\begin{array}{lll}
0 & 1 & 1 \\
1 & 0 & 1 \\
1 & 1 & 0
\end{array}\right]\)
det A = \(\left|\begin{array}{lll}
0 & 1 & 1 \\
1 & 0 & 1 \\
1 & 1 & 0
\end{array}\right|\) = 0(0 – 1) – 1 (0 – 1) + 1(1 – 0)
= 0(- 1) – 1 (- 1) + 1(1) = 0 + 1 + 1 = 2

Find the determinant of the matrix
\(\left[\begin{array}{lll}
\mathbf{a} & \mathbf{h} & \mathbf{g} \\
\mathbf{h} & \mathbf{b} & \mathbf{f} \\
\mathbf{g} & \mathbf{f} & \mathbf{c}
\end{array}\right]\).
Answer:
abc + 2fgh – af2 – bg2 – ch2

Find the determinant of the matrix
\(\left[\begin{array}{lll}
\mathbf{a} & \mathbf{b} & \mathbf{c} \\
\mathbf{b} & \mathbf{c} & \mathbf{a} \\
\mathbf{c} & \mathbf{a} & \mathbf{b}
\end{array}\right]\)
Answer:
3abc – a3 – b3 – c3

TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Matrices Important Questions Very Short Answer Type

Question 23.
Find the determinant of the matrix \(\left[\begin{array}{ccc}
1^2 & 2^2 & 3^2 \\
2^2 & 3^2 & 4^2 \\
3^2 & 4^2 & 5^2
\end{array}\right]\). [Mar. 10]
Answer:
Let A = \(\left[\begin{array}{ccc}
1^2 & 2^2 & 3^2 \\
2^2 & 3^2 & 4^2 \\
3^2 & 4^2 & 5^2
\end{array}\right]=\left[\begin{array}{ccc}
1 & 4 & 9 \\
4 & 9 & 16 \\
9 & 16 & 25
\end{array}\right]\)
det A = 1(225 – 256) – 4 (100 – 144) + 9 (64 – 81)
= – 31 + 176 – 153
= 176 – 184 = – 8.

Question 24.
If A = \(\left[\begin{array}{rrr}
1 & 0 & 0 \\
2 & 3 & 4 \\
5 & -6 & x
\end{array}\right]\) and det A = 45, then find x. [May 09, 03, 99, 96, Mar; 07, 03]
Answer:
Given A = \(\left[\begin{array}{rrr}
1 & 0 & 0 \\
2 & 3 & 4 \\
5 & -6 & \mathrm{x}
\end{array}\right]\) and det A = 45.
det A = 1 (3x + 24) – 0(2x – 20) + 0 (-12 – 15) = 3x + 24 – 0 + 0 = 3x + 24
Given, det A = 45 ⇒ 3x + 24 = 45 ⇒ 3x = 45 – 24 ⇒ 3x = 21 ⇒ x = 7.

Question 25.
Find the adjoint and inverse of the matrix \(\left[\begin{array}{rr}
2 & -3 \\
4 & 6
\end{array}\right]\). [Mar. 12]
Answer:
Let A = \(\left[\begin{array}{rr}
2 & -3 \\
4 & 6
\end{array}\right]\)
Cofactor of 2 is A1 = + (6) = 6
Cofactor of 4 is A2 = – (- 3) = 3
Cofactor of – 3 is B1 = – (4) = – 4
Cofactor of 6 is B2 = + (2) = 2
∴ Cofactor matrix of A is B = \(\left[\begin{array}{ll}
\mathrm{A}_1 & \mathrm{~B}_1 \\
\mathrm{~A}_2 & \mathrm{~B}_2
\end{array}\right]=\left[\begin{array}{cc}
6 & -4 \\
3 & 2
\end{array}\right]\)
Adj A = B’ = \(\left[\begin{array}{cc}
6 & 3 \\
-4 & 2
\end{array}\right]\)
det A = ad – bc = 12 – (- 12) = 12 + 12 = 24 ≠ 0
∴ A is invertiable.
A-1 = \(\frac{{adj} A}{{det} A}=\frac{1}{24}\left[\begin{array}{rr}
6 & 3 \\
-4 & 2
\end{array}\right]\)

TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Matrices Important Questions Very Short Answer Type

Find the adjoint and the Inverse of the matrix A = \(\left[\begin{array}{cc}
1 & 2 \\
3 & -5
\end{array}\right]\). [Mar. 18 (AP); May 06]
Answer:
\(\left[\begin{array}{cc}
-5 & -2 \\
-3 & 1
\end{array}\right],\left[\begin{array}{cc}
\frac{5}{11} & \frac{2}{11} \\
\frac{3}{11} & \frac{-1}{11}
\end{array}\right]\)

Question 26.
Find the adjoint and inverse of the matrix A = \(\left[\begin{array}{cc}
\cos \alpha & -\sin \alpha \\
\sin \alpha & \cos \alpha
\end{array}\right]\) [Mar. 13, 09]
Answer:
Let A = \(\left[\begin{array}{cc}
\cos \alpha & -\sin \alpha \\
\sin \alpha & \cos \alpha
\end{array}\right]\)

Cofactor of cos α is A1 = + (cos α) = cos α
Cofactor of sin α is A2 = – (- sin α) = sin α
Cofactor of – sin α is B1 = – (sin α) = – sin α
Cofactor of cos α is B2 = + (cos α) = cos
TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Matrices Important Questions Very Short Answer Type 20

Question 27.
Find the rank of the matrix\(\left[\begin{array}{lll}
1 & 1 & 1 \\
1 & 1 & 1 \\
1 & 1 & 1
\end{array}\right]\). [Mar. 18 (TS); May 10; Mar. 08]
Answer:
Let A = \(\left[\begin{array}{lll}
1 & 1 & 1 \\
1 & 1 & 1 \\
1 & 1 & 1
\end{array}\right]\)
det A = 1(1 – 1) – 1(1 – 1) + 1 (1 – 1) = 0 – 0 + 0 = 0
Since det A = 0, Rank [A] ≠ 3
Now, \(\left[\begin{array}{ll}
1 & 1 \\
1 & 1
\end{array}\right]\) is a submatrix of A, whose determinant is 1 – 1 = 0 ∴ Rank [A] ≠ 2.
Now. [1] is a submatrix of A, whose determinant is 1 ≠ 0. ∴ Rank [A] = 1

TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids

Telangana TSBIE TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material 10th Lesson Mechanical Properties of Solids Textbook Questions and Answers.

TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material 10th Lesson Mechanical Properties of Solids

Very Short Answer Type Questions

Question 1.
State Hooke’s law of elasticity.
Answer:
Hooke’s law states that within elastic limit stress is proportional to strain.
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids 1
This constant is known as elastic modulus of the body.

Question 2.
State the units and dimensions of stress.
Answer:
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids 2
Dimensional formula ML-1 T-2

Question 3.
State the units and dimensions of modulus of elasticity.
Answer:
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids 3
Nm-2 (or) pascal
Dimensional formula ML-1 T-2

Question 4.
State the units and dimensions of Young’s modulus.
Answer:
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids 4
Dimensional formula ML-1

Question 5.
State the units and dimensions of modulus of rigidity.
Answer:
Modulus of rigidity,
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids 5
(or) pascal
Dimensional formula ML-1T².

TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids

Question 6.
State the units and dimensions of Bulk modulus.
Answer:
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids 6
unit is Nm-2 (or) pascal
Dimensional formula ML-1 T-2

Question 7.
State the examples of nearly perfect elastic and plastic bodies.
Answer:
There is no perfectly elastic body. But behaviour of Quartz fiber is very nearer to perfectly elastic body.

Real bodies are not perfectly plastic, but behaviour of wet clay, butter etc., can be taken as examples for perfectly plastic bodies.

Short Answer Questions

Question 1.
Define Hooke’s law of elasticity, proportionality, permanent set, and breaking stress.
Answer:
Hooke’s Law :
It states that within elastic limit, stress is proportional to strain.
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids 7
This constant is called elastic constant (E).
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids 8

Proportionality limit:
When load is increased the elongation of the wire will also increases. The maximum load upto which the elongation is directly proportional to the load is called proportionality limit (A). The graph drawn between load and extension. It is a straight line OA’.

Permanent set :
If the load on the wire is increased beyond elastic limit, the elongation is not pro portional to load. On removal of the load the wire cannot regain its original length. The length of the wire increases permanently. In figure permanent set is given by OP. This is called permanent set.

Breaking stress :
If the load is increased beyond yield point the elongation is very rapid, even for small changes in load and wire becomes thinner and breaks. This is shown as E. The breaking force per unit area is called breaking stress.

Question 2.
Define modulus of elasticity, stress, strain and Poisson’s ratio.
Answer:
1) Stress:
Restoring force acting on unit area is called stress.
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids 9
Unit: N/m² (or) pascal;
Dimensional formula: ML-1T-2.

2) Strain :
The change in dimension per unit original dimension of a body is called strain.
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids 10
It is a ratio, so no units and dimensional formula.

3) Modulus of elasticity :
∴ From Hooke’s Law Stress x Strain or
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids 11
The ratio of stress to strain is called modulus of elasticity.
Unit: N/m².
Dimensional formula: ML-1T-2.

4) Poisson’s ratio :
It is defined as the ratio of lateral contraction strain to longitudinal elongation strain.
Poisson’s ratio
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids 12
It is a ratio, so no units and dimensional formula.

TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids

Question 3.
Define Young’s modulus, Bulk modulus, and Shear modulus.
Answer:
1) Young’s Modulus Y:
Within elastic limit, the ratio of longitudinal stress to longitudinal strain is called Young’s modulus
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids 13

2. Bulk Modulus (B) :
Within elastic limit, the ratio of volumetric stress to volumetric strain is called Bulk modulus
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids 14

3) Shear Modulus or Rigidity Modulus (G):
Within elastic limit, the ratio of tangential or shearing stress to shearing strain is called Shear modulus or Rigidity modulus.
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids 15

Question 4.
Define stress and explain the types of stress. [AP War. 19; TS War. 16]
Answer:
Stress:
When a body is subjected to a deforming force, then restoring forces will develop inside the body. These restoring forces will oppose any sort of change in its original shape. The restoring force per unit area of the surface is called stress.

Stress:
Stress is defined as force applied per unit area.
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids 16
D.F. = ML-1T-2 ; Unit: N/m² (or) Pascal.

Types of stress :
It is of three types. They are : 1) Longitudinal stress 2) Tangential stress (or) Shear stress 3) Volumetric stress.

Longitudinal stress:
If the force applied on a body is along its lengthwise direction then it is called longitudinal stress. It produces deformation in length.
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids 17

Tangential stress (or) Shear stress:
Force applied per unit area parallel to the surface of a body trying to displace the upper layers of the body is called shearing stress.
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids 18
(Parallel to the surface layers)

Volumetric stress:
If force is applied on all the sides of a body or on the volume of a body then it is called volumetric stress.
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids 19

Question 5.
Define strain and explain the types of strain.
Answer:
Strain:
Strain is defined as deformation produced per unit dimension. It is a ratio. So no units.
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids 20

Types of strain :
Strain is of three types. They are: 1) Longitudinal strain 2) Tangential strain or Shear strain 3) Volumetric strain.

Longitudinal strain:
The ratio of elongation to original length along length wise direction is defined as longitudinal strain.
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids 21

Shearing strain :
If the force applied on a body produces a change in shape only it is called shearing force. The angle through which a plane originally perpendicular to the fixed surface shifts due to the application of shearing stress is called shearing strain or simply shear (θ).
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids 22

Question 6.
Define strain energy and derive the equation for the same. [TS Mar. ’19; May ’18; AP Mar. ’14; May ’14]
Answer:
Strain energy :
The energy developed in (string) a body when it is strained is called strain energy.

Let a force F be applied on lower end of wire, fixed at the upper end. Let the extension be dl.
∴ Work done = dW = Fdl
Total work done in stretching it from 0
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids 23

Question 7.
Explain why steel is preferred to copper, brass, aluminium in heavy-duty machines and in structural designs.
Answer:
For metals Young’s moduli are large. Therefore, these materials require a large force to produce small change in length. To increase the length of a thin steel wire of 0.1 cm² cross-sectional area by 0.1 %, a force of 2000 N is required. The force required to produce the same strain in aluminium, brass, and copper wire having the same cross-sectional area are 690 N, 900N, and 1100 N respectively. It means that steel is more elastic than copper, brass, and aluminium. It is for this reason that steel is preferred in heavy duty machines and in structural designs.

Question 8.
Describe the behaviour of a wire under gradually increasing load. [AP Mar. ’18, ’17, ’16, ’15, ’13, May ’16, ’13; TS Mar. 18, 17, 15; May 17,16; June 15]
Answer:
Behaviour of a wire under increasing load:
Let a wire is suspended at one end and loads are attached to the other end. When loads are gradually increased the following changes are noticed.

1) Proportionality limit (A) :
When load is increased the elongation of the wire gradually increases. The maximum load upto which the elongation is directly pro-portional to the load is called proportionality limit (A). The graph drawn between load and extension is a straight line. So point A is called proportionality limit. In this region Hooke’s Law is obeyed.

2) Elastic limit (B):
If the load is increased above the proportionality limit the elongation is not proportional to the load. Hooke’s law is not obeyed. But it exhibits elasticity which means that it regains the original length if load is removed. The maximum load on the wire upto which it exhibits elasticity is called elastic limit (B in the graph).
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids 24

3) Permanent set (C) :
If the load on the wire is increased beyond elastic limit say upto C, the elongation is not proportional to load. On removal of the load, the wire does not regain its original length. Length of wire increases perma-nently. In figure permanent set is given by OP. So OP is called permanent set.

4) Point of ultimate tensile strength (D) :
If the load is further increased, upto D’ then strain increases rapidly even though there is no increase in stress.

At this stage the restoring forces seems to be subdued to then deforming forces. Elongation without increase in load is called creeping. This behaviour of metal is called yielding.

5) Fracture point (E) :
If the load is increased beyond Yield point the elongation is very rapid, even for small changes in load the wire becomes thinner and breaks. This is shown as E. The breaking force per unit area is called breaking stress.

TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids

Question 9.
Two identical solid balls, one of ivory and the other of wet clay are dropped from the same height on to the floor. Which one will rise to a greater height after striking the floor and why?
Answer:
We know that ivory ball is more elastic than wet-clay ball. Therefore, the ivory ball will tend to regain its original shape in a very short time after the collision. Due to it, there will be large energy and momentum transfer to the ivory ball in comparison to the wet-clay ball. As a result of it, the ivory ball will raise higher after the collision.

Question 10.
While constructing buildings and bridges a pillar with distributed ends is preferred to a pillar with rounded ends. Why?
Answer:
Use of pillars or columns is very common in buildings and bridges. A pillar with roun-ded-ends supports less load than that with a distributed shape at the ends. Hence, for this reason, while constructing buildings and bridges a pillar with distributed ends is preferred to a pillar with rounded ends.

Question 11.
Explain why the maximum height of a mountain on earth is approximately 10 km?
Answer:
A mountain base is not under uniform compression and this provides some shearing stress to the rocks under which they can flow. The stress due to all the material on the top should be less than the critical shearing stress at which the rocks flow.

At the bottom of a mountain of height ‘h’, the force per unit area due to the weight of the mountain is hpg where p is the density of the material of the mountain and g is the acceleration due to gravity. The material at the bottom experiences this force in the vertical direction and the sides of the mountain are free. There is a shear component, approximately hpg itself. Now the elastic limit for a typical rock is 3 × 107 Nm-2. Equating this to hpg with ρ = 3 × 10³ kg m-3 gives
h = \(\frac{30\times10^{-7}}{3\times10^3\times10}\) = 10 km
Hence, the maximum height of a mountain on earth is approximately 10 km.

Question 12.
Explain the concept of Elastic Potential Energy in a stretched wire and hence obtain the expression for it. [AP May ’ 18, 17; AP June 15]
Answer:
When a wire is put under a tensile stress, work is done against the inter atomic forces. This work is stored in the form of “Elastic potential energy.”

Expression to elastic potential energy:
To stretch a wire, force is applied. As a result it elongates. So the force applied is useful to do some work. This work is stored in it as potential energy. When the deforming force is removed, this energy is liberated as heat. The energy developed in a body (string) when it is strained is called strain energy.

Let a force F be applied on a wire fixed at the upper end. Let the extension be dl.
∴ Work done = dW = Fdl
Total work done in stretching from
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids 25

Long Answer Questions

Question 1.
Define Hooke’s law of elasticity and describe an experiment to determine the Young’s modulus of the material of a wire.
Answer:
Hooke’s Law :
Within elastic limit, stress is directly proportional to strain.
strain ∝ stress
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids 26
where E constant called modulus of elasticity of the material of a body.

Determination of Young’s modulus of a wire:
The apparatus used to find Young s modulus of a wire consists of two long wires A and B of same length made with same material are used. These two wires are suspended from a rigid support and a vernier scale V’ is attached to them. Wire A is connected to the main scale (M). A fixed load is connected to this cord to keep tension in the wire. This is called reference wire. The second Wire B’ is connected to vernier scale V’. Adjustable load hanger is connected to this wire. This is called experimental wire.

Procedure :
Let a load M1 is attached to the weight hanger at vernier. Main scale reading (M.S.R) and vernier scale reading (V.S.R) are noted. Weights are gradually increased in the steps of \(\frac{1}{2}\) kg upto a maximum load of say 3 kg. Every time M.S.R and V.S.R are noted. They are placed in tabular form.

Now loads are gradually decreased in steps of \(\frac{1}{2}\) kg. While decreasing M.S.R and V.S.R are noted for every load, values are posted in tabular form.

Let 1st reading with mass M1 is e1 and 2nd reading with mass M2 is e2.

Change in load M = M2 – M1
elongation e = e2 – e1
‘M’ and ‘e’ values are calculated and a graph is plotted.
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids 27

Force on the wire = mg
Area of cross section of the wire = πr²
(r = radius of the wire)
Elongation = e
Original length = l
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids 28

A graph is between load (m) and elongation ‘e’, is straight line passing through the origin. The slope of the graph (tan θ) gives (\(\frac{m}{e}\)). The value is substituted in the above equation to find Young’s modulus of the material of the wire.

Precautions:

  1. The load applied should be much smaller than elastic limit.
  2. Reading is noted only after the air bubble is brought to centre of spirit level.

Problems

Question 1.
A copper wire of 1mm diameter is stretched by applying a force of 10 N. Find the stress in the wire.
Solution:
Diameter, d = 1mm
∴ radius, r = 0.5 mm = 0.5 × 10-3m
Force, F = 10N
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids 29

Question 2.
A tungsten wire of length 20cm is stretched by 0.1cm. Find the strain on the wire.
Solution:
Length of wire, l = 20cm = 0.2m
elongation, e = 0.1cm = 1 × 10-3m
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids 30

Question 3.
If an iron wire is stretched by 1%, what is the strain on the wire?
Solution:
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids 31

TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids

Question 4.
A brass wire of diameter 1mm and of length 2m is stretched by applying a force of 20N. If the increase in length is 0.51mm, find i) the stress, ii) the strain and iii) the Young’s modulus of the wire.
Solution:
Length of wire, l = 2m;
L diameter, d = 1mm = 10-3 m
Force, F = 20N;
Increase in length, e = 0.51mm
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids 32
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids 33

Question 5.
A copper wire and an aluminium wire have lengths in the ratio 3: 2, diameters in the ratio 2 : 3 and forces applied in the ratio 4: 5. Find the ratio of increase in length of the two wires. (YCu = 1.1 × 1011 Nm-2, YAl = 0.7 × 1011Nm-2)
Solution:
Ratio of lengths, l1 : l2 = 3 : 2;
Ratio of diameters, d1 : d2 = 2 : 3
Ratio of forces, F1 : F2 = 4 : 5
Y1 = Y of copper = 1.1 × 1011
Y2 = Y of Aluminium = 0.7 × 1011;
Ratio of elongation, e1 : e2 = ?
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids 34

Question 6.
A brass wire of cross-sectional area 2mm² is suspended from a rigid support and a body of volume 100cm³ is attached to its other end. If the decrease in the length of the wire is 0.11mm, when the body is completely immersed in water, find the natural length of the wire.
(Ybrass = 0.91 × 1011 Nm-2, ρwater = 10³kgm-3)
Solution:
Area of cross section, A = 2mm = 2 × 10-6
Volume of body, V = 100 cc = 100 × 10-6
Decrease in length, e’ = 0.11mm = 0.11 × 10-3m
Youngs modulus of brass, Y = 0.91 × 1011 N/m²
Density of water, ρ = 1000 kg / m³
Use e’ = \(\frac{V\rho gl}{AY}\)
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids 35

Question 7.
There are two wires of same material. Their radii and lengths are both in the ratio 1 : 2. If the extensions produced are equal, what is the ratio of the loads?
Solution:
Ratio of lengths, l1 : l2 = 1 : 2
Ratio of radii, r1 : r2 = 1 : 2
Extensions produced are equal ⇒ e1 = e2;
Made of same material ⇒ Y1 = Y2
Ratio of loads m1 : m2 = ?
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids 36

TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids

Question 8.
Two wires of different material have same lengths and areas of cross-section. What is the ratio of their increase in length when forces applied are the same? (Y1 = 0.90 × 1011 Nm-2, Y2 = 3.60 × 1011 Nm-2.)
Solution:
Lengths are same ⇒ l1 = l2 ;
Area of cross sections are same, A1 = A2
Y1 = 0.9 × 1011 N/m²
Y2 = 3.60 × 1011 N/m²
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids 37

Question 9.
A metal wire of length 2.5m and area of cross-section 1.5 × 10-6 m² is stretched through 2mm. If its Young’s modulus is 1.25 × 1011 Nm-2, find the tension in the wire.
Solution:
Length of wire, l = 2.5m
Y = 1.25 × 1011N/m²
Area of cross section, A = 1.5 × 10-6
Elongation, e = 2 m.m = 2 × 10-3m
Tension, T = mg = F = ?
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids 38

Question 10.
An aluminium wire and a steel wire of the same length and cross-section are joined end-to-end. The composite wire is hung from a rigid support and a load is suspended from the free end. If the increase in length of the composite wire is 1.35 mm, find the ratio of the (i) stress in the two wires and 0Q strain in the two wires. (YAl = 0.7 × 1011 Nm-2, Ysteel = 2 × 1011m-2)
Solution:
i) Length is same ⇒ l1 = l2
Area is same ⇒ A1 = A2
In composite wire same load will act on both wires.
∴ Ratio of stress = 1 : 1

ii) Total elongation, e = 1.35mm =eAl + es
Young’s modulus of aluminium = 7 × 1010 N/m²
Y of steel = 2 × 1011 N/m²
Elongation, e = \(\frac{Fl}{AY}\)
But F, l and A are same
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids 39
∴ Ratio of strains in the wires is 20 : 7.

Question 11.
A 2 cm cube of some substance has its upper face displaced by 0.15cm due to a tangential force of 0.3 N while keeping the lower face fixed. Calculate the rigidity modulus of the substance.
Solution:
Side of cube, a = 2.0 cm = 2 × 10-2 m
Area, A = 4 × 10-4
Displacement of upper layer = 0.15cm
= 0.15 × 10-2m
Tangential force, F = 0.30N
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids 40

Question 12.
A spherical ball of volume 1000 cm³ is subjected to a pressure of 10 atmosphere. The change in volume is 10-8 cm³. If the ball is made of iron, find its bulk modulus. (1 atmosphere = 1 × 105 Nm-2)
Solution:
Volume of ball, V = 1000 cm³ = 10-3
(∵ 1M³ = 106 cm³)
Pressure, P = 10 atmospheres
= 10 × 105 pa ( v 1 atm = 105 pascal)
Change in volume, ∆V = 10-8 cm³
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids 41

Question 13.
A copper cube of side of length 1 cm is subjected to a pressure of 100 atmosphere. Find the change in its volume if the bulk modulus of copper is 1.4 × 1011 Nm-2 (1 atm = 1 × 105 Nm-2).
Solution:
Side of cube, a’ = 1cm = 10-2m
∴ Volume of cube = 10-6m
Pressure, P = 100 atm = 100 × 105 = 107 pa
Bulk modulus, K = 1.4 × 1011 N/m²;
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids 42

Question 14.
Determine the pressure required to reduce the given volume of water by 2%. Bulk modulus of water is 2.2 × 109 Nm-2
Solution:
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids 43

TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids

Question 15.
A steel wire of length 20 cm is stretched to increase its length by 0.2 cm. Find the lateral strain in the wire if the Poisson’s’ ratio for steel is 0.19.
Solution:
Length of wire, l = 20, cm = 0.20m,
Poisson’s ratio, σ =0.19
Increase in length, ∆l = 0.2 cm = 2 × 10-3m
lateral strain = ?
Lateral strain = σ × longitudinal strain ‘e’
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids 44

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics

Telangana TSBIE TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Lesson 3(b) Chemical Kinetics Textbook Questions and Answers.

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Lesson 3(b) Chemical Kinetics

Very Short Answer Questions (2 Marks)

Question 1.
Define the speed or rate of a reaction.
Answer:
The rate of a reaction is the change in con-centration of a reactant or product in unit time. It can be expressed in terms of:

  1. the rate of decrease in concentration of any one of the reactants, or
  2. the rate of increase in concentration of any one of the products.

Question 2.
Assuming that the volume of the system is constant, derive the expression for the average rate of the system R → P in terms of R and P. [time = t sec; R = reac-tant, P = product]
Answer:
Considering a hypothetical reaction assuming that the volume of the system remains constant.
R → P
One mole of the reactant R produces one mole of the product P. If [R], and [P], are the concentrations of R and P respectively at time t1 and [R]2 and [P]2 are their concentrations at time t2 then
Δt = t2 – t1 ; Δ[R] = [R]2 – [R]1
Δ[P] = [P]2 – [P]1
Rate of disappearance of R =
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics 5
Rate of appearance of P =
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics 6
These equations represent the average rate of a reaction.

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics

Question 3.
What are the units of rate of reaction?
Answer:
The units of rate of reaction are concentration × time-1. If concentration is mol L-1 and time is in seconds then the units will be mol L-1 s-1. For gaseous reaction the units of rate equation are atm s-1.

Question 4.
Draw the graphs that relate the concen-tration (C) of the reactants and the reac-tion times (t) and the concentrations of the products (C) and the reaction times (t) in chemical reactions.
Answer:
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics 7

Question 5.
Write the equation for the rate of the reaction
5Br (aq) + \(\mathrm{BrO}_3{ }^{-}(\mathrm{aq})\) + 6H+(aq) → 3Br2(aq) + 3H2O(l)
Answer:
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics 8

Question 6.
What is rate law? Illustrate with an example.
Answer:
The rate law is the expression in which rea-ction rate is given in terms of molar concen-tration of reactants. Each concentration term is raised to some power, which may or may not be same as the stoichiometric coefficient of the reacting species in balanced chemical equation. Example
2NO (g) + O2(g) → 2NO2(g)
Rate = k [NO]2 [O2]

Question 7.
Mention a reaction for which the exponents of concentration terms are not the same as their stochiometric coefficient in the rate equation.
Answer:
i) Formation of CCl4 from CHCl3?
CHCl3 + Cl2 → CCl4 + HCl
Rate = k[CHCl3] [Cl2]1/2

ii) CH3COO C2H5 + H2O → CH3COOH
+ C2H5OH
Rate = k[CH3COOC2H5]1 [H2O]0

Question 8.
Define order of a reaction. Illustrate your answer with an example. (TS 15)
Answer:
The sum of the powers of the concentration terms of the reactants in the rate law expre-ssion is called the order of that reaction.
Order of reaction can be 0, 1, 2, 3 and even fraction.

Example :
Rate = k[A]1/2 [B]3/2
Order = \(\frac{1}{2}\) + \(\frac{3}{2}\) = 2. i.e., second order

Question 9.
What are elementary reactions?
Answer:
The reactions taking place in one step are called elementary reactions.

Question 10.
What are complex reactions ? Name one complex reaction.
Answer:
If a reaction takes place in a sequence of elementary reactions called mechanism in which reactants convert into products, it is called complex reaction. These may be consecutive reactions, e.g. Oxidation of ethane to CO2 and H2O proceeds through a series of intermediate steps in which alcohol, aldehyde and acid are formed.

Question 11.
Give the units of rate constants for zero, first order and second order reactions.
Answer:
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics 1

Question 12.
Define molecularity of a reaction. Illustrate with an example.
Answer:
The number of reacting species (atoms, ions, molecules) taking part in an elementary reaction, which must collide simultaneously in order to bring about a chemical reaction is called molecularity of a reaction.

Example:

i) NH4NO2 → N2 + 2H2O
Since only one molecule is involved in the reaction it is unimolecular reaction.

ii) H2 + I2 → 2HI
Since two molecules are involved in the reaction it is a bimolecular reaction.

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics

Question 13.
What is rate determining step in a complex reaction ?
Answer:
Suppose if a reaction proceeds in a sequence of elementary reactions, the overall rate of reaction is controlled by the slowest step and it is called as rate determining step.

Question 14.
Give the mechanism for the decomposition reaction of H2O2 in alkaline medium cata-lysed by I ion.
Answer:
Decomposition of H2O2 in alkaline medium catalysed by I ions proceeds in the following steps.

  1. H2O2 + I → H2O + IO
  2. H2O2 + IO → H2O + I + O2

Question 15.
Write the equation relating [R], [R]0 and reaction time ‘t’ for a zero order reaction [R] = concentration of reactant at time ‘t’ and [R]0 = initial concentration of reactant.
Answer:
k = \(\frac{[\mathrm{R}]_0-[\mathrm{R}]}{\mathrm{t}}\) ; Rate = \(\frac{-\mathrm{d}[\mathrm{R}]}{\mathrm{dt}}\) = k[R]0
k = rate constant
[R]0 = initial concentration
[R] = concentration of reactant at time t.

Question 16.
Draw the graph that relates the concentra-tion ‘R’ of the reactant and’t’ the reaction time for a zero order reaction.
Answer:
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics 2

Question 17.
Give two examples for zero order reactions. (TS Mar. ‘ 19 )
Answer:

  1. The decomposition of gaseous ammonia on a hot platinum surface is a zero order reaction at high pressure.
    TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics 3
  2. Thermal decomposition of HI on gold surface is zero order reactions.
    TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics 4
  3. Photochemical reactions are zero order

Question 18.
Write the Integrated equation for a first order reaction In terms of [R], [R]0 and t.
Answer:
k = \(\frac{2.303}{t}\) log \(\frac{[\mathrm{R}]_0}{[\mathrm{R}]}\)
k = First order rate constant
[R] = Concentration of R at time t
[R]0 = initial concentration R

Question 19.
Give two examples for gaseous first order reactions. (IPE 14)
Answer:

  1. Hydrogenation of ethane is an example of first order reaction.
    C2H4(g) + H2(g) → C2H6(g)
  2. Decomposition of N2O5
    N2O5 (g) → 2NO2 + \(\frac{1}{2} \mathrm{O}_2(\mathrm{~g})\)

Question 20.
For the reaction: A(a) → B(g) + C(g), write the integrated rate equation in terms of total pressure p and the partial pressures PAPBPC.
Answer:
Total pressure Pt = PA + PB + PC
pA, pB and pC are the initial pressures of A, B and C respectively.
pi = initial pressure at time, t = 0.
k = \(\frac{2.303}{t}\)log \(\frac{p_i}{p_A}\) = \(\frac{2.303}{\mathrm{t}}\)log \(\frac{p_i}{2 p_i-p_t}\)

Question 21.
What is half-life of a reaction? Illustrate your answer with an example.
Answer:
The half – life of a reaction is the time in which the concentration of a reactant is reduced to one half of its initial concen-tration. It is represented by t½.
Ex: Half life of C – 14 is 5730 years.
t1/2 = \(\frac{0.693}{\mathrm{k}}\)
For a first order reaction half-period Is constant and is independent of initial con-cent ration.

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics

Question 22.
Write the equation relating the half-life (t1/2) of a reaction and the rate constant ‘K’ for first order reaction.
Answer:
For the first order reaction
k = \(\frac{2.303}{t}\)log \(\frac{[\mathrm{R}]_0}{[\mathrm{R}]}\) at t1/2 [R] = \(\frac{[\mathrm{R}]_0}{2}\)
So the above equation becomes
k = \(\frac{2.303}{t_{1 / 2}}\) log \(\frac{[\mathrm{R}]_0}{[\mathrm{R}]_{0 / 2}}\)
or t1/2 = \(\frac{2.303}{\mathrm{k}}\)log 2 or t1/2 = k
For a first order reaction half-period is constant and is independent of initial con-centration.

Question 23.
Write the equation useful to calculate half-life (t1/2) values for zero and first order reactions.
Answer:

  1. Half-life for zero order reaction
    t1/2 = \(\frac{[\mathrm{R}]_0}{2 \mathrm{k}}\)
  2. Half-life for first order reaction
    t1/2 = \(\frac{693}{\mathrm{k}}\) k is rate constant

Question 24.
What are Pseudo first order reactions? Give one example.
Answer:
The reactions which appear to be second order but follow the first order rate equation are called Pseudo first order reactions.
Example :
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics 9
Since the concentration of water is large excess, the change in concentration of water is negligible. So its concentration is taken as constant. Then rate of reaction depend only on the concentration of CH3COOC2H5.
Rate = k[CH3COOC2H5]
Inversion of cane sugar is another example of pseudo first order reaction.

Question 25.
Write the Arrhenlus equation for the rate constant (k) of a reaction.
Answer:
Arrhenius equation for the rate constant (k) is
k = Ae-Ea/RT
A = Arrhenlus frequency factor
R = Gas constant
Ea = Activation energy measured in Joules mol-1
T = Absolute temperature

Question 26.
By how many times the rate constant increases for rise of reaction temperature by 10°C?
Answer:
For a chemical reaction with rise in temperature by 10° the rate constant is nearly doubled.

Question 27.
Explain the term ‘activation energy’ of a reaction with a suitable diagram.
Answer:
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics 10
The energy required to form the intermediate called activated complex (C) is known as activatioñ energy Ea.

Question 28.
Write the equation which relates the rate constants k1 and k2 at temperatures T1 and T2 of a reaction.
Answer:
log \(\frac{\mathrm{k}_2}{\mathrm{k}_1}\) = \(\frac{\mathrm{E}_{\mathrm{a}}}{2.303 \mathrm{R}}\left[\frac{\mathrm{T}_2-\mathrm{T}_1}{\mathrm{~T}_1 \mathrm{~T}_2}\right]\)
k1 and k2 are the rate constants of a reaction at temperatures T1 and T2 respectively. Ea is activation energy.

Question 29.
What is collision frequency (Z) of a reac-tion? How is rate related to it for the reaction A + B → Products.
Answer:
The number of collisions per second per unit volume of the reactibn mixture is known as collision frequency (Z).
For a bimolecular elementary reaction
A + B → Products
Where ZAB represents the collision frequency of reactants A and B. \(\mathrm{e}^{-\mathrm{Ea} / \mathrm{RT}}\) represent the fraction of molecules with energies equal to or greater than Ea.

Question 30.
Draw the graphs between potential energy – reaction coordinates for catalysed and uncatalysed reactions.
Answer:
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics 11
Effect of catalyst on activation energy

Question 31.
What is the effect of temperature on the rate constant?
Answer:
The rate constant of reaction is almost doubled for every rise of 10° in temperature. The temperature dependence of rate of a
chemical reaction is given by Arrhenius equation
k = A. \(\mathrm{e}^{-\mathrm{Ea} / \mathrm{RT}}\)
A = Arrhenius frequency factor
T = Absolute temperature
R = Gas constant
Ea = Activation energy

Short Answer Questions (4 Marks)

Question 32.
Define average rate of a reaction. How is the rate of reaction expressed in terms of change in the concentration of reactants and products for the following reactions.
1) 2HI (g) → H2(g) + I2(g)
2) Hg(l) + Cl2 (g) → HgCl2(s)
3) 5Br,sup>- (aq) + \(\mathrm{BrO}_3^{-}(\mathrm{aq})\) + 6H+(aq) → 3Br2(aq) + 3H2O(l)
Answer:
The average rate of a reaction is defined as the rate of change of concentration per unit time.
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics 12

Question 33.
What is rate equation? How is it obtained? Write the rate equations for
1) 2NO(g) + O2(g) → 2NO2(g)
2) CHCl3 + Cl2 → CCl4 + HCl
3) CH3COOC2H5(l) + H2O(l) → CH3COOH(aq) + C2H5OH(l)
Answer:
The mathematical expression written in terms of concentration of reactants, which actually influence the rate is called rate law or rate equation.

1) 2NO(g) + O2(g) → 2NO2(g)
Rate = k [NO]2 [O2]
2) CHCl3 + Cl2 → CCl4 + HCI
Rate = k [CHCl3] [Cl2]1/2
3) CH3COOC2H5 + H2O → CH3COOH + C2H5OH
Rate = k [CH3COOC2H5]1 [H2O]0

Experimental data shows that the exponents of the concentration terms may be same as their stoichiometric coefficients in the balance chemical equation as in the example (1) or may not be same as in examples (2) and (3).

Question 34.
Define and explain the order of a reaction. How is it obtained experimentally?
Answer:
The sum of the powers of exponents to which the concentration terms are raised in the rate law expression is called order of reaction.
For a hypothetical reaction
aA + bB → Products
The rate equation is Rate = k[A]x [B]y
Where x + y = n = order of the reaction. The decrease in the concentration of reactants or the increase in the concentration of products are measured experimentally. These values are substituted in rate constant equations of different order of reactions. The equation that gives constant value gives the order of reaction.

Question 35.
What is “molecularity” of a reaction? How is it different from the ‘order’ of a reaction ? Name one bimolecular and one tri- molecular gaseous reactions. (IPE 14)(Mar. 2018 AP)
Answer:
The number of reacting species (atoms, ions or molecules) taking part in an elementary reaction which must collide simultaneously in order to bring about a chemical reaction is called molecularity of a reaction.

  1. Order of a reaction is an experimental quality. It can be zero and even a fraction but molecularity cannot be zero or non – integer.
  2. Order is applicable to elementary as well as complex reactions whereas molecularity is applicable only for elementary reactions. For complex reaction molecularity has no meaning.
  3. For complex reaction, order is given by the slowest step and molecularity of the slowest step is taken as the order of the overall reaction.

Dissociation of hydrogen iodide into H2 and I2 is a bimolecular reaction.
2HI → H2 + I2
Formation of NO2 from NO and O2 is a trimolecular reaction.
2NO + O2 → 2NO2

Question 36.
Derive the integrated rate equation for a zero order reaction.
Answer:
Zero order reaction means that the rate of the reaction is proportional to zero power of the concentration of reactants. Consider the reaction
R → P
Rate = –\(\frac{\mathrm{d}[\mathrm{R}]}{\mathrm{dt}}\) = k[R]°
or Rate = –\(\frac{\mathrm{d}[\mathrm{R}]}{\mathrm{dt}}\) = k × 1( ∵ [R]° = 1)
d[R] = – kdt
Integrating both sides
[R] = – kt +1 (I = integration constant) … (1)
At t = 0, the concentration of the reactant
R0 = [R]0, When [R]0 is initial concentration of the reactant.
Substituting in equation (1)
[R]0 = -k × 0 + 1
[R]0 = I
Substituting the value of I in (1)
[R] = – kt + [R]0 ….. (2)
Further simplifying equation (2) we get the rate constant k as
k = \(\frac{[\mathrm{R}]_0-[\mathrm{R}]}{\mathrm{t}}\)

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics

Question 37.
Derive an Integrated rate equation for a first order reaction.
Answer:
In this type of reactions, the rate of the reaction is proportional to the first power of the concentration of the reactant R. For
example
Rate = –\(\frac{\mathrm{d}[\mathrm{R}]}{\mathrm{dt}}\) = k[R] or \(-\frac{\mathrm{d}[\mathrm{R}]}{\mathrm{R}}\) = kdt
Integrating tuis equation we get
In [R] = -kt + I (I = integration constant) ….. (1)
When t = 0, [R] = [R]0
∴ ln [R]0 = -k × 0 + I
ln [R]0 = I
Substituting the value I in equation (1)
ln[R] = -kt + ln[R]0 or ln \(\frac{[\mathrm{R}]}{\left[\mathrm{R}_0\right]}\) = -kt
or k = \(\frac{1}{\mathrm{t}} \ln \frac{[\mathrm{R}]_0}{[\mathrm{R}]}\) or k = \(\frac{2.303}{t} \log \frac{[R]_0}{[R]}\)
This is the integrated rate equation for first order reaction.

Question 38.
Derive an integrated rate equation in terms of total pressure [P] and the partial pressures PA, PB, PC for the gaseous reaction
A(g) → B(g) + C(g).
Answer:
The gaseous reaction A(g) → B(g) + C(g)
Let P1 be the initial pressure of A and bt the total pressure at time t. Integrated rate equation for such a react Ion can be derived as
Total pressure Pt = PA + PB + PC
PA, PB and PC are the partial pressures of A, B and C respectively.
If x atm be the decrease in pressure of A at time t and one mole each of B and C is being formed, the increase in pressure of B and C will also be x atm each.
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics 13
When pi is the intial pressure at time t = 0
Pt = (pi – x) + x + x = pi + x
x = pt – pi
Where PA = pi – x
= pi – (pt – pi)
= 2pi – pt
k = \(\frac{2.303}{t}\)log\(\frac{p_i}{p_A}\)
= \(\frac{2.303}{t}\)log\(\frac{p_i}{2 p_i-p_t}\)

Question 39.
What is half-life (t1/2) of a reaction? Derive the equations for the ‘half-life’ value of zero and first order reactions.
Answer:
The half – life of a reaction is the time in which the concentration of a reactant is reduced to one half of its initial concentra-tion. It is represented as t½.
For the first order reaction
k = \(\frac{2.303}{t}\) log\(\frac{[\mathrm{R}]_0}{[\mathrm{R}]}\) at t1/2[R] = \(\frac{[\mathrm{R}]_0}{2}\)
So the above equation becomes
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics 14

Question 40.
What is Arrhenius equation? Derive an equation which describes the effect of rise of temperature (T) on the rate constant (k) of a reaction.
Answer:
Arrhenius equation explains the temperature dependence of the rate of a chemical reac-tion. Arrhenius equation is
k = Ae-Ea/RT
Where A is the Arrhenius factor, or the frequency factor. R is gas constant and Ea is activation energy in J mol-1.
Taking natural logarithms of both sides
In k = –\(\frac{\mathrm{E}_{\mathrm{a}}}{\mathrm{RT}}\) + ln A …… (1)
At temperature T1, the equation (1) is
In k1 = –\(\frac{E_a}{R T}\) + ln A …… (2)
At temperature T2, the equation (1) is
In k2 = –\(\frac{\mathrm{E}_{\mathrm{a}}}{\mathrm{RT}}\) + ln A …… (3)
Subtracting equation (2) from (3) we get
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics 15

Question 41.
Discuss the effect of catalyst on the kinetics of a chemical reaction with a suitable diagram.
Answer:
A catalyst is a substance which increase the rate of a reaction without itself undergoing any permanent chemical change.
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics 16
It is believed that the catalyst provides an alternate pathway or reaction mechanism by reducing the activation energy between reactants and products and hence lowering the potential energy barrier as shown in the figure. Lower the value of activation energy faster will be the rate of reaction.

Question 42.
Describe the salient features of the collision theory of reaction rates of bimolecular reactions. (Mar. 2018-TS)
Answer:
Collision theory is based on kinetic theory of gases. According to this theory

  1. The reactant molecules are assumed to be hard spheres and
  2. Reaction is postulated to occur when molecules collide with eách other.
  3. A reaction occurs on collision of two molecules only if they possess a certain minimum amount of energy in excess of the normal energy of molecules.
  4. The minimum energy which molecules must possess before collision should be equal to or greater than the activation energy.
  5. The collisions in which the reactant molecules have proper orientation only leads to the formation of products.
  6. Whereas Improper orientation makes them bounce back and no products are formed.
  7. The collisions in which reactant molecules convert into product molecules are called effective or fruitful collisions.

Question 43.
Explain the terms
a) Activation energy (Ea)
b) ColIsIon frequency (Z)
c) Probability factor (P) with respect to Arrhenius equation.
Answer:
a) Activation energy : According to Arrhenius, a reaction takes place only when reactant molecules collide and form an unstable intermediate which have higher potential energy than reactant or product molecules. The energy required
for the formation of this intermediate or activated complex is called activation energy.

b) Collision frequency : According to collision theory the reactant molecules are assumed to be hard spheres and reaction occurs when molecules collide with each other. The number of collisions per second per unit volume of the reaction mixture is known as collision frequency (Z). For the bimolecular elementary
A + B → Products
Rate = ZAB\(\mathrm{e}^{-\mathrm{E}_{\mathrm{a}} / \mathrm{RT}}\)
ZAB represents the collision frequency of reactants A and B.

c) Probability factor: To account for effective collisions, a factor known as probability factor or steric factor is introducted. It takes into account the fact that in a collision molecules must be properly oriented.
(ie.,) Rate = P × ZABeEa/RT
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics 17

Long Answer Questions

Question 44.
Explain the following terms with suitable examples.
(a) Average rate of a reaction
(b) Slow and fast reactions
(c) Order of a reaction
(d) Molecularity of a reaction
(e) Activation energy of a reaction.
Answer:
a) Average rate of a reaction : The average rate of a reaction is defined as the rate of change of concentration per unit time.
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics 18

b) Slow and fast reactIons : The reactions which takes place instantaneously are called fast reactions. Ionic reactions are fast reactions e.g. Precipitation of silver chloride occurs instantaneously by mixing aqueous solutions of silver nitrate and sodium cholride.
Some reactions takes place slowly e.g. rusting of iron, invension of sugar, hydrolysis of starch. These reactions are called slow reactions.

c) Order of ReactIon : The sum of the powers or exponents to which the concentration terms are raised in the rate law expression is called order of reaction.
For a hypothetical reaction
aA + bB → Products
The rate equation is Rate = k[A]x [B]y
Where x + y = n = order of the reaction.

d) Molecularity of the reaction : The number of reacting species (atoms or ions or molecules) taking part in an elementary reaction which must collide simultaneously in order to bring about a chemical reaction is called molecularity of a reaction.
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics 19

e) Activation energy of a reaction: Accor-ding to Arrhenius, a reaction takes place only when reactant molecules collide and form an unstable intermediate which have higher potential energy than reac-tant or product molecules. The energy required for the formation of this inter-mediate or activated complex is called activation energy.
Ea = ET – ER

Question 45.
Give two examples for each of zero order and first order reactions. Write the equa-tions for the rate of a reaction interms of concentration changes of reactants and products for the following reactions.
1) A(g) + B(g) → C(g) + D(g)
2) A(g) → B(g) + C(g)
3) A(g) + B(g) → C(g)
Answer:
Examples for zero order reaction :

i) The decomposition of gaseous ammonia on a hot platinum surface is a zero order reaction at higher pressure.
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics 20
At high pressure, the surface of the metal is completely covered with gas molecules, so unable to alter the ammonia on the surface of the catalyst making the rate of reaction independent of its concentration.

ii) Thermal decomposition of HI on gold surface is another example of zero order reaction.
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics 21

iii) Some enzyme catalysed reactions are zero order reactions.

Examples for first order reactions:

i) Decomposition of N2O5.
N2O5 → 2NO2 + \(\frac{1}{2}\)O2

ii) All natural and artificial radioactive decay of unstable nuclei take place by first order kinetics.
\({ }_{88}^{226} \mathrm{Ra}\) → \({ }_2^4 \mathrm{He}\) + \({ }_{86}^{224} \mathrm{Rn}\)

Rate of reactions:
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics 22

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics

Question 46.
Discuss the effect of temperature on the rate of a reaction. Derive necessary equations in this context.
Answer:
The rate constant of a reaction increases with increase of temperature. This increase is generally two fold to five-fold for 10° rise in temperature. This is explained on the basis of collision theory. The main points of collision theory are as follows.

  1. For a reaction to occur, there must be collisions between the reacting species.
  2. Only a certain fraction of total collisions are effective in forming the products.
  3. For effective collisions the molecules must possess the sufficient energy equal to or greater than activation energy as well as proper orientation.

On the basis of above conclusions, rate of reaction is given by
Rate = f × z where f is the effective collisions and z is total number of collisions per unit volume per second.

Quatitatively the effect of temperature on the rate of reaction and hence on the rate constant k was proposed by Arrhenlus.
k = Ae-Ea/RT —– (1)

Where A is a constant called frequency factor, Ea is the energy of activation R is gas constant and T is the absolute temperature.
The factor e-Ea/RT gives the fraction of molecules having energy equal to or greater than the activation energy, Ea.
Taking logarithms on both sides of equation (1) we get
In k = ln A – \(\frac{\mathrm{E}_{\mathrm{a}}}{\mathrm{RT}}\)
The value of rate constant at temperatures T1 and T2 are k1 and k2 respectively, then we have
ln k1 = ln A – \(\frac{\mathrm{E}_{\mathrm{a}}}{\mathrm{RT}_1}\) …. (2)
ln k2 = ln A – \(\frac{\mathrm{E}_{\mathrm{a}}}{\mathrm{RT}_2}\) …. (3)
Subtracting equation (2) from (3) we get
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics 23

Question 47.
Give a detailed account of the collision theory of reaction rates of bimolecular gaseous reactions. (TS 16: IPE 14)
(TS Mar. 19; (Mar.2018.TS)
Answer:
According to collision theory

  1. The reactant molecules are assumed to be hard spheres.
  2. Reaction occur only when molecules collide each other.
  3. All collisions do not lead to the forma-tion of products.
  4. The collisions in which the molecules having threshold energy and proper orientation leads to the formation of products.
  5. Such collisions are called effective collisions.
  6. The number of collisions per second per unit volume of the reaction mixture is known as collision frequency (Z).
  7. Activation energy also effects the rate chemical reactions. For a bimolecular elementary reaction.
    A + B → Products Rate of reaction is
    Rate = ZAB e-Ea/RT
    Where ZAB represents the collision frequency of reactants. A and B and e-Ea/RT represents the fraction of molecules with energies equal to or greater than Ea.
  8. If the colliding molecules have improper orientation they bounce back and no reaction takes place.
  9. To account for effective collisions a new factor ‘p called probability or steric factor is introduced
    Rate = PZABe-Ea/RT
    TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics 24
  10. Thus, in collision theory activation energy and proper orientation of the molecules together determine the criteria for
    an effective collision and hence the rate of a chemical reaction.

Numerical Data Based And Concept Oriented Questions

Question 48.
A reaction is 50% completed in 2 hours and 75% completed In 4 hours. What is the order of the reaction?
Answer:
50% completed means half – life.
So for first order reaction t1/2 = 0.
or k = \(\frac{0.693}{k}\) = 0.3465 mol hr-1
In the second experiment 75% completed in 4 hours.
k = \(\frac{2.303}{t} \log \frac{[R]_0}{[R]}\)
[R]0 = 100, [R] = 25
∴ k = \(\frac{2.303}{4}\)log\(\frac{100}{25}\) = \(\frac{2.303}{4}\) log 4
= \(\frac{2.303}{4}\) × 0.6021 = 0.3466
Since k is constant in both experiments, it is first order reaction.

Question 49.
A reaction has a half-life of 10 minutes. Calculate the rate constant for the first order reaction. (TS ’16)
Answer:
For first order reaction
k = \(\frac{0.693}{t_{1 / 2}}\) = \(\frac{0.693}{10}\) = 0.0693 min-1

Question 50.
In a first order reaction, the concentration of the reactant is reduced from 0.6 mol/L to 0.2 mol/L m 5 min. Calculate the rate constant (k).
Answer:
Initial concentration [R]0 = 0.6 moL/L
Concentration after 5mn [R] = 0.2 mol /L
First order rate equation
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics 25

Question 51.
The rate conant for a zero order reaction in A is 0.0030 mol L-1 s-1. How long it will take for the initial concentration of A to fall from 0.10M to 0.075M.
Answer:
For zero order reaction
k = \(\frac{[\mathrm{R}]_0-[\mathrm{R}]}{\mathrm{t}}\) or t = \(\frac{[\mathrm{R}]_0-[\mathrm{R}]}{\mathrm{t}}\)
k = 0.0030 mol L-1 s-1
[R]0 = 0.10M
[R] = 0.075
∴ t = \(\frac{0.10-0.075}{0.0030}\) = 8.33 sec

Question 52.
A first order decomposition reaction takes 40mm for 30% decomposition. Calculate its t1/2 value.
Answer:
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics 26

Question 53.
Calculate the half-lIfe of first order reaction whose rate constant is 200 s-1.
Answer:
For first order reaction
t1/2 = \(\frac{0.693}{\mathrm{k}}\) = \(\frac{0.693}{200}\) = 0.003465
= 3.465 × 10-3 s

Question 54.
The thermal decomposition of HCOOH is a first order reaction. The rate constant is 2.4 × 10-3 s-1 at a certain temperature. Calculate how long will It take for 3/4 of initial quantity of HCOOH to decompose.
Answer:
Rate constant k = 2.4 × 10-3s-1
[R]0 = 1; [R] = 0.25 ;
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics 27

Question 55.
The decomposition of a compound is found to follow first order rate law. If it takes 15 minutes for 20% of original material to
react, calculate the rate constant.
Answer:
For a first order reaction
k = \(\frac{2.303}{t} \log \frac{[R]_0}{[R]}\)
[R]0 = 100; [R] =80; t = 15
k = \(\frac{2.303}{15}\)log\(\frac{100}{80}\) = \(\frac{2.303}{15}\) log 1.25
= \(\frac{2.303}{15}\) × 0.0963 = 0.0148 min-1

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics

Question 56.
In a pseudo first order hydrolysis of ester in water, the following results are obtained
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics 28
Calculate the average rate of reaction between the time Interval 30 to 60 s.
Answer:
i) Average rate of reaction between interval time 30 to 60 seconds is given by
Average rate = \(\frac{\Delta \mathrm{x}}{\Delta \mathrm{t}}\) = \(\frac{\mathrm{C}_2-\mathrm{C}_1}{\Delta \mathrm{t}}\)
= \(\frac{0.17-0.31}{60}\) = \(-\frac{0.14}{30}\)
= -0.00467 = -4.67 × 10-3 Ms-1
Minus sign indicate that the rate of reaction is decreasing with time as concentration of ester is decreasing with time.

ii)
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics 29

Question 57.
The half – life for a first order reaction is 5 × 10-6 s. What percentage of the Initial reactant will react in 2 hours?
Answer:
Given that
Half-life for the first order reaction = 5 × 10-6 s
First order rate constant, k = \(\frac{0.693}{5 \times 10^{-6} \mathrm{~s}}\)
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics 30

Question 58.
H2O2 (aq) decomposes to H2O(l) and O2(g) in a first order reaction w.r.t. H2O2. The rate constant is k = 1.06 × 10-3 min-1. How long it will take 15% of the sample to de-compose ?
Answer:
Given that
Rate constant k = 1.06 × 10-3 min-1
Initial concentration of reactant [R]0 = 100
Concentration of reactant at time
t[R]t = 100 – 15 = 85
First order rate constant
k = \(\frac{2.303}{t} \log \frac{\left[R_o\right]}{[R]}\);
t = \(\frac{2.303}{1.06 \times 10^{-3}} \log \frac{100}{85}\) ; t = 153 min

Question 59.
Show that in the case of first order reaction, the time required for 9999% completion of the reaction is 10 times that required for 50% completion. (log 2 = 3010)
Answer:
When the reaction has completed 99.9%
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics 31

Question 60.
The rate constant of a reaction is doubled when the temperature is raised from 298K to 308K. Calculate the activation energy.
Answer:
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics 32

Question 61.
The first order rate constant k for the reaction C6H5I(g) → C2H4(g) + HI(g) at 600K is 1.60 × 10-5s-1. The energy of activation is 209 kJ mol. Calculate k at 700 K.
Answer:
Given that
Rate constant at 600 K = 1.60 × 10-5 s-1
Rate constant at 700 K =?
R = 8.314 J kJ mol-1
T1 = 600K T2 = 700K
Activation energy Ea = 209 kJ mol-1 = 209000 J
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics 33

Question 62.
The activation energy for the reaction 2HI(g) → H2(g) + I2(g) at 581K is 209.5 kJ/mol. Calculate the fraction of molecules having energy equal to or greater than activation energy. (R = 8.31 JK-1 mol-1]
Answer:
Temperature T = 581K
Activation energy Ea = 209.5 JK mol-1
R = 8.314 JK-1 mol-1
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics 34

Question 63.
For the reaction R → p, the concentration of a reactant changes from 0.03M to 0.02M in 25 minutes. Calculate the average
rate of reaction using units seconds.
Answer:
Given that
[R]0 = 0.03M
[R] = 0.02M
[R]0 – [R] = 0.03 – 0.02 = 0.01M
Time = 25 mm = 25 × 60 sec.
Average rate of reaction = \(\frac{[R]_0-[R]}{t}\)
= \(\frac{0.01}{25 \times 60}\) = 6.66 × 10-6 Ms-1

Question 64.
In a reaction 2A → Products, the concentration of A decreases from 0.5 mol L-1 to 0.4 moL-1 in 10 minutes. Calculate the rate during this Interval.
Answer:
2A → Products
Rate \(\frac{\mathrm{dx}}{\mathrm{dt}}\) = \(-\frac{1}{2} \frac{\Delta[\mathrm{A}]}{\Delta \mathrm{t}}\)
Δ[A] = 0.5 – 0.4 = 0.1 mol-1
Rate = \(-\frac{1}{2} \times \frac{0.1}{10}\) = 5 × 10-3 mol-1 L-1 min-1

Question 65.
For a reaction, A + B → product : the rate law is given by r = k[A]1/2[B]2. What is the order of reaction?
Answer:
Order of reaction Is the sum of the powers of concentration terms in rate equation.
Rate equation r = k[A]1/2 [B]2
∴ order = 0.5 + 2 = 2.5

Question 66.
The conversion of molecules X to Y follows second order kinetics. If concentration of X is increased by three times, how will it affect the rate of formation of Y.
Answer:
Since the reaction follows second order kinetics r = k(x)2
x increases by 3 times
∴ r = k(3)2
So rate increases by nine times.

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics

Question 67.
A first order reaction has a rate constant 1.15 × 10-3s-1. How long will 5g of this reactant take to reduce to 3g ?
Answer:
Rate constant k = 1.15 × 10-3s-1
Initial cone. [R]0 = 5
Conc. at time t [R] = 3
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics 35

Question 68.
Time required to decompose SO2Cl2 to half of its initial amount is 60 minutes. If the decomposition is a first order reaction, calculate the rate constant of the reaction.
Answer:
For first order reaction
k = \(\frac{0.693}{t_{1 / 2}}\) = \(\frac{0.693}{60 \times 60}\) = 1.925 × 10-4 sec-1
(or) 1.155 × 10-2 min-1

Question 69.
From the rate expression for the following reactions, determine their order of reaction and the dimensions of the rate constants.
i) 3NO(g) → N2O(g)
Rate = k[NO]2
ii) H2O2(aq) + 3I(aq) + 2H+ → 2H2O(l) + \(I_3^{-}\)
Rate = k[H2O2] [I]
iii) CH3CHO(g) → CH4(g) + CO(g)
Rae = k[CH3CHO]3/2
iv) C2H5Cl (g) → C2H4 (g) + HCl(g)
Rate = k[C2H5Cl]
Answer:
i) 3NO(g) → N2O (g)
Rate = k[NO]2
Order w.r.t NO = 2
Overall order = 2
Units of k = (mol L-1)1-2 s-1
= mol-1 L s-1

ii) H2O2 + 3l + 2H+ → 2H2O + \(I_3^{-}(\mathrm{aq})\)
rate = k[H2O2] [I]
Order w.r.t. H2O2 = 1
Order w.r.t. I = 1
Overall order =2
Units of k = (mol L-1)1-2 s-1
= mol-1 L s-1

iii) CH3 CHO(g) → CH4(g) + CO(g)
rate = k[CH3CHO]3/2
Order w.r.t. CH3CHO = 1.5
Overall order = 1.5
Units of k = (mol L-1)1-1.5s-1
= mol1/2 L1/2 s-1

iv) C2H5Cl(g) → C2H4(g) + HCl (g)
rate = k[C2H5Cl]
order w.r.t. C2H5Cl = 1
overall order = 1
Units of k = (mol L-1)1-1 s-1
= s-1

Question 70.
For the reaction 2A + B → AB, the rate = k[A][B]2 with k = 2.0 × 106 v mol-2 L2s-1. Calculate the Initial rate of the reaction when [A] = 0.1mol L-1, [B] = 0.2 mol L-1. Calculate the rate of reaction after [A] is reduced to 0.06 mol L-1.
Answer:
Given that
k = 2.0 × 10-6 mol-2 L2 s-1
[A] = 0.1 mol L-1
[B] = 0.2 mol L-1

i) Initial rate = k[A] [B]2
= 2 × 10-6 × 0.1 × (0.2)2
∴ Rate of reaction = 8 × 10-9 mol L-1sec-1

ii) 2A + B → AB
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics 36
r = 2 × 10-6 × 0.06 × (0.18)2
∴ Rate of reaction = 3.89 × 10-9 mol L-1sec-1

Question 71.
The decomposition of NH3 on platinum surface is zero order reaction. What are the rates of production of N2 and H2 if k = 2.5 × 10-4 mol-1 Ls-1.
Answer:
Since the decomposition of NH3 on platinum surface is zero order.
So rate of reaction k = 2.5 × 10-4 mol L-1 sec-1.
2NH3 → N2 + 3H2
\(\frac{\mathrm{dx}}{\mathrm{dt}}\) = \(\frac{\mathrm{dN}_2}{\mathrm{dt}}\) = \(\frac{1}{3} \frac{\mathrm{dH}_2}{\mathrm{dt}}\)
Rate production of N2 = \(\frac{\mathrm{dN}_2}{\mathrm{dt}}\) = \(\frac{\mathrm{dx}}{\mathrm{dt}}\)
= 2.5 × 10-4 mol-1 L-1 sec-1
Rate production of H2 = \(\frac{\mathrm{dH}_2}{\mathrm{dt}}\) = \(\frac{3 \mathrm{dx}}{\mathrm{dt}}\)
= 7.5 × 10-4 mol L-1 sec-1

Question 72.
The rate expression for the decomposition of dimethyl ether in terms of partial pressures is given as Rate = k(pCH3 O CH3)3/2. If the pressure is measured in bar and time in minutes, then what are the units of rate and rate constant ?
Answer:
Units of rate = bar min-1
r = k p3/2
bar min-1 = k (bar)3/2
∴ k = bar-1/2 min-1

Question 73.
A reaction is second order with respect to a reactant. How is the rate of reaction is affected if the concentration of the reactant is
(i) doubled
(ii) reduced to half.
Answer:
Ratio of second order reaction = k[Reactant]2
When the concentration is doubled Rate = k[2]2
∴ Rate increases by 4 times.
When concentration is reduced to half.
rate = k\(\left[\frac{1}{2}\right]^2\)
∴ Rate decreases to \(\frac{1}{4}\) times.

Question 74.
A reaction is first order in A and second order in B.
i) Write the differential rate equation,
ii) How is the rate affected on increasing the concentration of B three times ?
iii) How is the rate affected when the concentration of both A and B are doubled ?
Answer:
The reaction is first order in A and second order in B.
∴ The differential rate equation r = k [A]1 [B]2
When the concentration of B is increased three times r = k[A][B]2
∴ rate increases by 9 times
When the concentration of both A and B are doubled
r = k[2][2]2
∴ Rate increases by 8 times.

Question 75.
In a reaction between A and B, the initial rate of reaction (r0) was measured for different initial concentrations of A and B as given below :
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics 37
What is the order of the reaction with respect to A and B ?
Answer:
Rate of reaction r = kAm Bn
5.07 × 10-5 = k(0.2)m (0.3)n
5.07 × 10-5 = k(0.2)m (0.1)n
1.43 × 10-5 = k(0.4)m (0.05)n
∴ order of reaction with respect to A = 1.5
∴ r = k A1.5 B0
order of reaction with respect to B = 0

Question 76.
The following results have been obtained during the kinetic studies of the reaction:
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics 38
Determine the rate law and rate constant for the reaction.
Answer:
When [A] = [B] the intial rate of formation of D is 6.0 × 10-3 mol L-1 min-1
From the experiment no.4 when the concentration of A is increased four times keeping the concentration B. Constant the rate increases by 4 times i.e.
6.0 × 10-3 × 4 = 2.4 × 10-2
So the order of reaction with respect to A is 1
From the experiments 2 and 3, when the concentration of B is doubled keeping the concentration of A constant the rate increases by 4 times i.e.,
7.2 × 10-2 × 4 = 2.88 × 10
∴ The order of reaction w.r.t B = 2
Rate law = k[A][B]2
Rate = k[A][B]2
6.0 × 10-3 = k[0.1] [0.1]2
6.0 × 10-3 = k × 1 × 10-3
k = \(\frac{6.0 \times 10^{-3}}{10^{-3}}\) = 6.0 Mol-1 L2 min-1

Question 77.
The rate constant for a first order is 60 s-1. How much time will It take to reduce the initial concentration of the reactant to its 1/16th value.
Answer:
Rate constant = 60 s-1
For first order reaction
t1/2 = \(\frac{0.693}{k}\) = \(\frac{0.693}{60}\) = 0.01155 sec.
t = 4t1/2 = 4 × 0.01155 = 4.62 × 10-2 sec.

Question 78.
For a first order reaction, show that the time required for 99% completion is twice the time required for completion of 90% of reaction.
Answer:
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics 39
∴ The time required for 99% completion is twice the time required for completion of 90% reaction.

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics

Question 79.
For the decomposition of azoisopropane to hexane and nitrogen at 543 K, the following data are obtained.

t(sec)p(mm of Hg)
035.0
36054.0
72063.0

Answer:
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics 40

Question 80.
The following data were obtained during the first order thermal decomposition of SO2Cl2 at a constant volume.
SO2Cl2(g) → SO2 (g) + Cl2 (g)

ExperimentTime/s-1Total Pressure / atm
100.5
21000.6

Calculate the rate of reaction when total pressure is 0.65 atm.
Answer:
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics 41
Pressure of SO2Cl2 = 0.35
∴ r = k[SO2Cl2] = (2.23 × 10-3) (0.35)
= 7.8 × 10-4 atm sec-1

Question 81.
The rate constant for the decomposition of hydrocarbons is 2.418 × 10-5 s-1 at 546K. If the energy of activation is 179.9 kJ / mol. What will be the value of pre – exponential factor?
Answer:
Rate constant for the decomposition of hydrocarbon = 2.418 × 10-5s-1
Temperature T = 546 K
Energy of activation Ea = 179.9 kJ / mol.
The value of pre-exponential factor ?
k = Ae-Ea/RT
2.418 × 10-5 = A.e-179.103/8.314 × 546
∴ A = 3.9 × 1012 sec-1.

Question 82.
Consider a certain reaction A → Products with k = 2.0 × 10-2 s-1. Calculate the concentration of A remaining after 100s if the initial concentration of A is 1.0 mol L-1.
Answer:
Rate constant k = 2.0 × 10-2 sec-1
Initial concentration [R]0 = 1.0 mol L-1
Time t = 100 s
Concentration after time T = [R] =?
k = \(\frac{2.303}{t} \log \frac{[R]_0}{[R]}\)
2 × 102 = \(\frac{2.303}{100} \log \frac{1}{1-x}\)
log \(\frac{1}{1-x}\) = 0.868
∴ 1 – x = 0.135M

Question 83.
Sucrose decomposes in acid solution into glucose and fructose according to the first order rate law, with t1/2 = 3.00 hours. What fraction of sample of sucrose remains after 8 hours ?
Answer:
Decomposition of sucrose in acid solution follows first order kinetics
Half – life t1/2 = 3.00 hours
For first order
k = \(\frac{0.693}{3} \mathrm{hr}^{-1}\)
∴ \(\frac{0.693}{3}\) = \(\frac{2.303}{8} \log \frac{1}{1-x}\)
1 – x = 0.157

Question 84.
The decomposition of hydrocarbon follows the equation
K = (4.5 × 1011 s-1) e-28000k/T. Calculate Ea.
Answer:
K = Ae-Ea/RT
\(\frac{E_a}{R}\) = 28000
Ea = 232.79 kJ/mole

Question 85.
The rate constant for the first order de-composition of H2O2 is given by the following equation: log k = 14.34 – 1.25 × 104 K/T. Calculate Ea for this reaction and at what a temperature will its half – life period be 256 minutes ?
Answer:
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics 42

Question 86.
The decomposition of A into product has value of k as 4.5 × 103 S-1 at 10°C and energy of activation 60 kJ mol-1. At what temperature would k be 1.5 × 104 s-1?
Answer:
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics 43

Question 87.
The time required for 10% completion of a first order reaction at 298 K is equal to that required for Its 25% completion at 308K. If the value of A is 4 × 1010 s-1, cal-culate k at 318 K and Ea.
Answer:
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics 44

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics

Question 88.
The rate of a reaction quadruples when the temperature changes from 293 K to 313 K. Calculate the energy of activation
of the reaction assuming that it does not change with temperature.
Answer:
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics 45

Intext Questions – Answerš

Question 1.
For the reaction R → P, the concentration of a reactant changes from 003M to 002M in 25 minutes. Calculate the average rate of reaction using units of time both in minutes and seconds.
Answer:
The average rate of reaction will be
= \(-\frac{\Delta R}{\Delta t}\) = –\(\frac{[R]_2-[R]_1}{t_2-t_1}\)
Now [R]2 = 0.02M, [R]1 = 0.03M, Δt = 25mm
∴Average rate = –\(\frac{0.02-0.03}{25}\) = –\(\frac{(-0.01)}{25}\)
= 4 × 10-4M min-1
= \(-\frac{(0.01)}{25 \times 60}\) = 6.66 × 10-6Ms-1

Question 2.
In a reaction 2A → products, the concentration of A decreases from 0.5 mol L-1 to 0.4 mol L-1 in 10 minutes. Calculate the rate during this Interval.
Answer:
Average rate = \(-\frac{1}{2} \frac{0.4-0.5}{10}\) = \(-\frac{1}{2} \frac{(-0.1)}{10}\)
= 5 × 10-3 M min-1

Question 3.
For a reaction A + B → product; the rate law is given by, r = k[A]1/2 [B]2. What is the order of the reaction?
Answer:
The order of reaction ¡s sum of powers of concentration terms.
Order = \(\frac{1}{2}\) + 2 = 2.5

Question 4.
The conversion of molecules x to y follows second order kinetics. If concentration of x is increased to threetlmes, how will it
effect the rate of formation of y?
Answer:
The reaction x → y follows second order Kinetics. Therefore, the rate equation for this reaction will be Rate = K[x]2
Let [x] = a mol L-1, then equation (1) can be written as
Rate = K. (a)2 = Ka2
If the concentration of x is Increased to three times then [x] = 3a mol L
Now the rate equation will be
Rate = K(3a)2 = 9(Ka)2
Hence the rate of formation will increase by 9 times.

Question 5.
A first order reaction has a rate constant 1.15 × 10-3s-1. How long will 5gm of this reactant take to reduce 3g?
Answer:
Given, Initial amount = 5g
Rate constant = 1.15 × 10-3 s-1
We know that for a 1st order reaction
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics 46

Question 6.
Time required to decompose SO2Cl2 to half of its initial amount is 60 minutes. If the decomposition is a first order reaction. Calculate the rate constant.
Answer:
We know that for a ¡st order reaction
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics 47

Question 7.
What will be the effect of temperature on rate constant?
Answer:
The rate constant of reaction is almost doubled for every rise of 100 in temperature. The temperature dependence of rate of a chemical reaçtion is given by Arrhenius equation
k = A.e-Ea/RT
A = Arrhenius frequency factor
T = Absolute temperature
R = Gas constant
Ea = Activation energy

Question 8.
The rate of the chemical reaction doubles for an increase of 10K in absolute temperature from 298 K. Calculate Ea.
Answer:
Given that T1 = 298 K
T2 = 298 + 10 = 308K
The rate of reaction will be doubled when temperature is raised by 100.
∴If the value of k1 = k; k2 = 2k
Substituting these values in Arhenious equation
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics 48

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics

Question 9.
The activation energy for the reaction
2HI (g) → H2(g) + I2(g) is 209.5kJ mol-1 at 581 K. Calculate the fraction of molecules of reactants having energy equal to or greater than activation energy.
Answer:
Here
Ea = 209.5kJ mol-1 = 209500 J mol-1
T = 581K; R = 8.314 JK-1 mol-1
The fraction of molecules having energy equal or more than activation energy is given by
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics 49
Now x = Anti log of 18.8323
= Anti log 19.1677 = 1.471 × 10-19

TS Inter 1st Year Maths 1A Mathematical Induction Important Questions

Students must practice these Maths 1A Important Questions TS Inter 1st Year Maths 1A Mathematical Induction Important Questions to help strengthen their preparations for exams.

TS Inter 1st Year Maths 1A Mathematical Induction Important Questions

Question 1.
By using mathematical induction show that ∀ n ∈ N, 12 + 22 + 32 + ……………… + n2 = \(\frac{n(n+1)(2 n+1)}{6}\)
Answer:
Let S(n) be the statement that 12 + 22 + 32 + …………… + n2 = \(\frac{n(n+1)(2 n+1)}{6}\)
If n = 1, then
LHS = n2 = 12 = 1
TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Mathematical Induction Important Questions 1
∴ S(k + 1) is true.
By the principle of mathematical induction S(n) is true, ∀ n ∈ N.
∴ 12 + 22 + 32 + ……………… +n2 = \(\frac{n(n+1)(2 n+1)}{6}\), ∀ n ∈ N.

TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Mathematical Induction Important Questions

Question 2.
By using mathematical Induction show that ∀ n ∈ N, 13 + 23 + 33 + …………. + n3 = \(\frac{n^2(n+1)^2}{4}\). [May 97, 94, 93, 88, Mar. 87]
Answer:
Let S(n) be the statement that 13 + 23 + 33 + ……….. + n3 = \(\frac{n^2(n+1)^2}{4}\)
If n = 1, then
L.H.S = n3 = 13
R.H.S = \(\frac{n^2(n+1)^2}{4}\) = \(\frac{1^2(1+1)^2}{4}\) = \(\frac{1.4}{4}\) = 1
∴ L.H.S = R.H.S
∴ S(1) is true.
Assume that S(k) is true.
TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Mathematical Induction Important Questions 2
∴ S(k + 1) is true.
By the principle of mathematical induction S(n) is true, ∀ n ∈ N.
∴ 13 + 23 + 33 + ………… + n3 = \(\frac{n^2(n+1)^2}{4}\), ∀ n ∈ N

Question 3.
By using mathematical induction show that ∀ n ∈ N, 2.3 + 3.4 + 4.5 + …………. upto n terms = \(\frac{n\left(n^2+6 n+11\right)}{3}\)
Answer:
2, 3, 4 ……………………. are in A.P.
Here a = 2, d = 3 – 2 = 1
∴ tn = a + (n – 1)d = 2 + (n – 1)1 = 2 + n – 1 = n + 1.
3, 4, 5 …………………… are in A.P.
Here a = 3, d = 4 – 3 = 1
∴ tn = a + (n – 1) d = 3 + (n – 1) 1 = 3 + n – 1 = n + 2.
∴ The nth term of the given series is (n + 1) (n + 2).
Let S(n) be the statement that
2.3 + 3.4 + 4.5 + + (n + 1) (n + 2) = \(\frac{n\left(n^2+6 n+11\right)}{3}\)
If n = 1, then
LHS = (n + 1) (n + 2) = (1 + 1) (1 + 2) = 2.3 = 6
RHS = \(\frac{\mathrm{n}\left(\mathrm{n}^2+6 \mathrm{n}+11\right)}{3}\) = \(\frac{1\left(1^2+6(1)+11\right)}{3}\) = \(\frac{18}{3}\) = 6
∴ LHS = RHS
∴ S(1) is true.
Assume that S(k) is true.
TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Mathematical Induction Important Questions 3

Verification Method:
\(\frac{\mathrm{n}\left(\mathrm{n}^2+6 n+11\right)}{3}\)
Put n = k + 1
TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Mathematical Induction Important Questions 4
∴ S(k + 1) is true.
By the principle of mathematical induction, S(n) is true ∀ n ∈ N.
∴ 2.3 + 3.4 + 4.5 + ……………… + (n + 1) (n + 2) = \(\frac{\mathrm{n}\left(\mathrm{n}^2+6 \mathrm{n}+11\right)}{3}\), ∀ n ∈ N

TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Mathematical Induction Important Questions

Question 4.
By using mathematical induction show that ∀ n ∈ N,
\(\frac{1}{1.3}+\frac{1}{3.5}+\frac{1}{5.7}+\ldots+\frac{1}{(2 n-1)(2 n+1)}=\frac{n}{2 n+1}\) [Mar. 18 May 15 (AP): May 14, 97, 92]
Answer:
TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Mathematical Induction Important Questions 5

Question 5.
By using mathematical induction show that ∀ n ∈ N, \(\frac{1}{1 \cdot 4}+\frac{1}{4 \cdot 7}+\frac{1}{7 \cdot 10}+\) …………….. upto n terms = \(\frac{n}{3 n+1}\).
Answer:
1, 4, 7, ………………… are in A.P.
Here, a = 1, d = 4 – 1 = 3
tn = a + (n – 1) d = 1 + (n – 1)3 = 1 + 3n – 3 = 3n – 2
4, 7, 10, ………………. are in A.P.
Here, a = 4, d = 7 – 4 = 3
tn = a + (n – 1) d = 4 + (n – 1)3 = 4 + 3n – 3 = 3n + 1
∴ The nth term in the given series is \(\frac{1}{(3 n-2)(3 n+1)}\).
TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Mathematical Induction Important Questions 6

TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Mathematical Induction Important Questions

Question 6.
By using mathematical induction show that ∀ n ∈ N,
a + (a + d) + (a + 2d) + upto n terms = \(\frac{n}{2}\) [2a + (n – 1) d].
Answer:
a, a + d, a + 2d, ………………….. are in A.P
∴ tn = a + (n – 1) d
∴ n th term in the given series is a + (n – 1) d.
Let S(n) be the statement that
a + (a + d) + (a + 2d) + ………………. + a + (n – 1) d = \(\frac{\mathrm{n}}{2}\) [2a + (n – 1) d]
If n = 1 then
L.H.S = a + (n – 1)d = a + (1 – 1)d = a
R.H.S = \(\frac{\mathrm{n}}{2}\) [2a + (n – 1)d] = \(\frac{1}{2}\) [2a + (1 – 1)d] = \(\frac{1}{2}\) [2a] = a
∴ L.H.S = R.H.S
∴ S(1) is true.
[a + (n – 1)d
put n = k + 1
a + (k + 1 – 1)d
= a + kd]
Assume that S(k) is true.
a + (a + d) + (a + 2d) + ………………… + [a + (k- 1) d] = \(\frac{\mathrm{k}}{2}\) [2a + (k – 1)d]
Adding (a + kd) on both sides, we get
TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Mathematical Induction Important Questions 7
∴ S(k + 1) is true.
By the principle of Mathematical Induction, s(n) is true, ∀ n ∈ N
∴ a + (a + d) + (a + 2d) + ….+ a + (n- 1) d = \(\frac{n}{2}\) [2a + (n – 1) d], ∀ n ∈ N

Question 7.
By using mathematical induction show that ∀ n ∈ N,
a + ar + ar2 + ………. upto n terms = \(\frac{a\left(r^n-1\right)}{r-1}\), r ≠ 1. [Mar. 19 (AP); Mar. 11, 80; May 87]
Answer:
a + ar + ar2 + ………. are in G.P.
∴ tn = a . rn – 1
The n th term in the given series is a . r n – 1
Let S(n) be the statement that
a + ar + ar2 + …………. + a ∙ rn – 1 = \(\frac{a\left(r^n-1\right)}{r-1}\)
If n = 1, then
L.H.S = a ∙ rn – 1 = a ∙ r1 – 1 = a ∙ r0 = a ∙ 1 = a
R.H.S = \(\frac{a\left(r^n-1\right)}{r-1}=\frac{a\left(r^1-1\right)}{r-1}=\frac{a(r-1)}{r-1}\) = a
∴ L.H.S = R.H.S
∴ S(1) is true.
[a.rn – 1
Put n = k + 1
a.rk + 1 – 1
a.rk]
Assume that S(k) is true.
a + ar + ar2 + …….. + a.rk – 1 = \(\frac{a\left(r^k-1\right)}{r-1}\)
Adding ark on both sides we get,
TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Mathematical Induction Important Questions 8
∴ S(k + 1) is true.
By the principle of mathematical induction, S(n) is true ∀ n ∈ N.
∴ a + ar + ar2 + ………………. + a . rn – 1 = \(\frac{a\left(r^n-1\right)}{r-1}\)

TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Mathematical Induction Important Questions

Question 8.
By using mathematical induction show that ∀ n ∈ N, 1.2.3 + 2.3.4 + 3.4.5 + …………………. upto n terms = \(\frac{n(n+1)(n+2)(n+3)}{4}\)
Answer:
1, 2, 3 …………………. are in A.P.
Here a = 1, d = t2 – t1 = 2 – 1 = 1
tn = a + (n – 1)d = 1 + (n – 1)1 = 1 + n – 1 = n
2, 3, 4 ………………… are in A.P.
Here a = 2, d = 3 – 2 = 1
tn = a + (n – 1)d = 2 + (n – 1)1 = 2 + n – 1 = n + 1
3, 4, 5 …………….. are in A.P.
Here a = 3, d = 4 – 3 = 1
tn = a + (n – 1)d = 3 + (n – 1)1 = 3 + n – 1 = n + 2
∴ The nth term in the given series is n(n + 1) (n + 2).
Let S(n) be the statement that
1.2.3 + 2.3.4 + 3.4.5 + ……………….. + n (n + 1) (n + 2) = \(\frac{n(n+1)(n+2)(n+3)}{4}\)
If n = 1 then
L.H.S = n(n + 1) (n + 2) = 1(1 + 1) (1 + 2) = 1.2.3 = 6
R.H.S = \(\frac{n(n+1)(n+2)(n+3)}{4}\) = \(\frac{1(1+1)(1+2)(1+3)}{4}\) = \(\frac{1.2 .3 .4}{4}\) = 6
∴ L.H.S = R.H.S
∴ S(1) is true Assume that s(k) is true
1.2.3 + 2.3.4 + 3.4.5 + ……………….. + k (k + 1) (k + 2) = \(\frac{\mathrm{k}(\mathrm{k}+1)(\mathrm{k}+2)(\mathrm{k}+3)}{4}\)
Adding (k + 1) (k + 2) (k + 3) on both sides we get
1.2.3 + 2.3.4 + 3.4.5 + …………….. + k (k + 1) (k + 2) + (k + 1) (k + 2) (k + 3)
TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Mathematical Induction Important Questions 9
∴ S(k + 1) is true.
∴ By the principle of mathematical induction, S(n) is true ∀ n ∈ N.
∴ 1.2.3 + 2.3.4 + 3.4.5 + ……………… + n(n + 1) (n + 2) = \(\frac{n(n+1)(n+2)(n+3)}{4}\) ∀ n ∈ N.

Question 9.
By using mathematical induction show that ∀ n ∈ N,
\(\frac{1^3}{1}+\frac{1^3+2^3}{1+3}+\frac{1^3+2^3+3^3}{1+3+5}\) + ……………….. upto n terms = \(\frac{n}{24}\) [2n2 + 9n + 13]. [Mar. 14, 07, 05]
Answer:
Numerator: nth = 13 + 23 + 33 + …………. + n3 = Σn3 = \(\frac{n^2(n+1)^2}{4}\)

Denominator: 1 + 3 + 5 + ………………. are in A.P.
Here a = 1, d = 3 – 1 = 2
tn = a + (n – 1) d = 1 + (n – 1) 2 = 1 + 2n – 2 = 2n – 1
∴ nth term is
TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Mathematical Induction Important Questions 10
∴ L.H.S = R.H.S
∴ S(1) is true.
Assume that S(k) is true.
TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Mathematical Induction Important Questions 11

Verification Method: \(\frac{\mathrm{n}}{24}\) [2n2 + 9n + 13]
Put n = k + 1
= \(\frac{(\mathrm{k}+1)}{24}\) [2(k + 1)2 + 9 (k + 1) + 13] = \(\frac{(\mathrm{k}+1)}{24}\) [2k2 + 2 + 4k + 9k + 9 + 13]
= \(\frac{1}{24}\) [2k3 + 2k + 4k2 + 9k2 + 9k + 13k + 2k2 + 2 + 4k + 9k + 9 + 13] = \(\frac{1}{24}\) [2k3 + 15k2 + 37k + 24]
∴ S(k + 1) is true.
By the principle of mathematical induction S(n) is true, ∀ n ∈ N.
TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Mathematical Induction Important Questions 12

TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Mathematical Induction Important Questions

Question 10.
By using mathematical induction show that ∀ n ∈ N, 12 + (12 + 22) + (12 + 22 + 32) + ……….. upto n terms = \(\frac{n(n+1)^2(n+2)}{12}\).
Answer:
TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Mathematical Induction Important Questions 13

Question 11.
By using mathematical induction show that ∀ n ∈ N, 2 + 3.2 + 4.22 + ……… upto n terms
Answer:
2.1 + 3.2 + 4.22 + ………………… upto n terms = n . 2n
2, 3, 4 ………….. are in A.P.
Here a = 2, d = 3 – 2 = 1
tn = a + (n – 1)d = 2 + (n – 1)1 = 2 + n – 1 = n + 1
1, 2, 22, ……………… are in G.P.
Here a = 1, r = \(\frac{2}{1}\) = 2
tn = a . rn – 1 = 1 . 2n – 1 = 2n – 1
∴ The nth term in the given series is (n + 1) (2n – 1).
Let S(n) be the statement that
2.1 + 3.2 + 4.22 + ……….. + (n + 1) 2n – 1 = n . 2n
If n = 1, then
L.H.S. = (n + 1)2n – 1 = (1 + 1) 21 – 1 = 2.20 = 2.1 = 2
R.H.S. = n . 2n = 1.21 = 2
∴ LHS = RHS
∴ S(1) is true.
[(n + 1)2n – 1
put n = k + 1
(k + 1 + 1) 2k + 1 – 1
(k + 2) . 2k]
Assume that S(k) is true.
2.1 + 3.2 + 4.22 + ……….. + (k + 1)2k – 1 = k . 2k
Adding (k + 2) . 2k on both sides, we get
2.1 + 3.2 + 4.22 + ………… + (k + 1) 2k – 1 + (k + 2) 2k = k. 2k + (k + 2) . 2k = 2k (k + k + 2)
= 2k (2k + 2) = 2k . 2 (k + 1) = (k + 1) . 2k + 1
∴ S(k + 1) is true.
∴ By the principle of mathematical induction, S(n) is true, ∀ n ∈ N.
2.1 + 3.2 + 4. 22 + ……………… + (n + 1) 2n – 1 = n . 2n, ∀ n ∈ N.

TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Mathematical Induction Important Questions

Question 12.
By using mathematical induction show that ∀ n ∈ N, 49n + 16n – 1 is divisible by 64 for all positive integer n. [Mar. 18 (TS); Mar. 17 (AP); May 13, 05, 98, 93]
Answer:
Let S(n) be the statement that f(n) = 49n + 16n – 1 is divisible by 64.
If n = 1, then
f(1) = 491 + 16.1 – 1 = 49 + 16 – 1 = 49 + 15 = 64 = 64 × 1 is divisible by 64
∴ S(1) is true.
Assume that S(k) is true.
f(k) is divisible by 64 ⇒ 49k + 16k – 1 is divisible by 64
⇒ 49k + 16k – 1 = 64 M for some integer M ⇒ 49k = 64M – 16k + 1
Now
f(k + 1) = 49k + 1 + 16 (k + 1) – 1 = 49k. 49 + 16k + 16 – 1 = (64M – 16k + 1) 49 + 16k + 15
= 64.49M – 784k + 49 + 16k + 15 = 64.49M – 768k + 64
= 64(49M – 12k + 1) is divisible by 64. [ ∵ 49M – 12k + 1 is an integer]
∴ S(k + 1) is true.
By the principle of mathematical induction S(n) is true ∀ n ∈ N.
∴ 49n + 16n – 1 is divisible by 64, ∀ n ∈ N.

Question 15.
By using mathematical induction show that 3 ∙ 52n + 1 + 23n + 1 is divisible by 17 ∀ n ∈ N. [May 12, 10, 08, 01, ’96]
Answer:
Let S(n) be the statement that f(n) = 3 . 52n + 1 + 23n + 1 is divisible by 17.
If n = 1, then
f(1) = 3.52.1 + 1 + 23.1 + 1 = 3.53 + 24 = 3(125) + 16 = 375 + 16 = 391 = 17 × 23 is divisible by 17
∴ S(1) is true.
Assume that S(k) is true.
∴ f(k) is divisible by 17.
⇒ 3.52k + 1 + 23k + 1 is divisible by 17.
⇒ 3.52k + 1 + 23k + 1 = 17 M for some integer M.
⇒ 3.52k + 1 = 17M – 23k + 1
Now f (k + 1) = 3 . 52(k + 1) + 1 + 23(k + 1) + 1 = 3.52k + 2 + 1 + 23k + 3 + 1
= 3.52k + 1 . 52 + 23k + 1 . 23
= (17M – 23k + 1) 25 + 8 . 23k + 1 = 17.25 M – 25.23k + 1 + 8 . 23k + 1
= 17.25 M – 17.23k + 1
= 17 (25 M – 23k + 1) is divisible by 17. [∵ 25M – 23k + 1 is an integer]
∴ S(k + 1) is true.
By the principle of mathematical induction, S(n) is true ∀ n ∈ N.
∴ 3 . 52n + 1 + 23n + 1 is divisible by 17, ∀ n ∈ N.

Question 14.
By using mathematical induction show that ∀ n ∈ N, xn – yn is divisible by x – y. [May 04]
Answer:
Let S(n) be the statement that f(n) = xn – yn is divisible by (x – y).
If n = 1 then
f(1) = x1 – y1 = x – y = (x – y) × 1 is divisible by (x – y)
∴ S(l) is true.
Assume that S(k) is true.
f(k) is divisible by (x – y).
⇒ xk – yk is divisible by (x – y)
⇒ xk – yk = (x – y) M, for some integer M.
⇒ xk = (x – y) M + yk
Now
f(k + 1) = xk + 1 – yk + 1 = xk . x – yk . y = [(x – y) M + yk] x – yk . y = (x – y) . M x + yk . x – yk . y
= (x – y) M x + yk (x – y) = (x – y) [Mx + yk] is divisible by (x – y).
[Mx + yk] is an integer.
∴ S(k + 1) is true.
By the principle of mathematical induction S(n) is true, ∀ n ∈ N.
∴ xn – yn is divisible by (x – y), ∀ n ∈ N.

TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Mathematical Induction Important Questions

Some More Maths 1A Mathematical Induction Important Questions

Question 1.
By using mathematical induction show that ∀ n ∈ N, 43 + 83+ 123 + ……………. upto n terms = 16n2 (n + 1)2.
Answer:
4, 8, 12, are in A.P.
Here a = 4, d = t2 – t1 = 8 – 4 = 4
tn = a + (n – 1)d = 4 + (n – 1)4 = 4 + 4n – 4 = 4n
∴ The nth term in the given series is (4n)3 = 64n3
Let S(n) be the statement that 43 + 83 + 123 + …………….. + 64n3 = 16n2 (n + 1)2
If n = 1, then
LHS = 64n3 = 64(1)3 = 64
RHS = 16n2 (n + 1)2 = 16.12 (1 +!)2 = 16.1.4 = 64
∴ LHS = RHS
∴ S(1) is true.
Assume that S(k) is true.
43 + 83 + 123 + ………………….. + 64k3 = 16k2 (k + 1)2
Adding 64(k + 1)3 on both sides, we get
43 + 83 + 123 + …………….. + 64k3 + 64(k + 1)3 = 16k2 (k + 1)2 + 64 (k + 1)3 = 16(k + 1)2 [k2 + 4 (k + 1)]
= 16(k + 1)2 [k2 + 4k + 4] = 16(k + 1)2 (k + 2)2 = 16(k + 1)2 (k + 1 + 1)2
∴ S(k + 1) is true.
By the principle of mathematical induction, S(n) is true ∀ n ∈ N.
∴ 43 + 83 + 123 + ………………. + 64n3 = 16n2 (n + 1)2, ∀ n ∈ N.

Question 2.
By using mathematical induction show that ∀ n ∈ N. 2.42n + 1 + 33n + 1 is divisible by 11.
Answer:
Let S(n) be the statement that f(n) = 2.42n + 1 + 33n + 1 is divisible by 11.
If n = 1, then
f(1) = 2.42.1 + 1 + 33.1 + 1 = 2.43 + 34 = 2(64) + 81
= 128 + 81 = 209 = 11 × 19 is divisible by 11.
∴ S(1) is true.
Assume that S(k) is true.
∴ f(k) is divisible by 11.
⇒ 2.42k + 1 + 33k + 1 is divisible by 11
⇒ 2.42k + 1 + 33k + 1 = 11 M, for some integer M
⇒ 2.42k + 1 = 11 M – 33k + 1
Now f(k + 1) = 2.42(k + 1) + 1 + 33(k + 1) + 1 = 2.42k + 2 + 1 + 33k + 3 + 1 = 2.42k + 1 . 42 + 33k + 1 . 33
= (11 M – 33k + 1) 16 + 27. 33k + 1 = 11.16 M – 16. 33k + 1 + 27.33k + 1 = 11.16M + 11.33k + 1
= 11(16 M + 33k + 1) is divisible by 11 (∵ 16 M + 33k + 1 is an integer)
∴ S(k + 1) is true.
By the principle of mathematical induction S(n) is true, ∀ n ∈ N.
∴ 2.42n + 1 + 33n + 1 is divisible by 11, ∀ n ∈ N.

TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Mathematical Induction Important Questions

Question 3.
Using mathematical induction prove that statement for all ∀ n ∈ N,
\(\left(1+\frac{3}{1}\right)\left(1+\frac{5}{4}\right)\left(1+\frac{7}{9}\right) \ldots\left(1+\frac{2 n+1}{n^2}\right)\) = (n + 1)2
Answer:
Let S(n) be the statement that \(\left(1+\frac{3}{1}\right)\left(1+\frac{5}{4}\right)\left(1+\frac{7}{9}\right) \ldots\left(1+\frac{2 n+1}{n^2}\right)\) = (n + 1)2
If n = 1, then
LHS = 1 + \(\frac{2 n+1}{n^2}\) = 1 + \(\frac{2.1+1}{(1)^2}\) = 1 + \(\frac{2+1}{1}\) = 1 + 3 = 4
RHS = (n + 1)2 = (1 + 1)2 = (2)2 = 4
∴ LHS = RHS
∴ S(1) = is true
Assume that S(k) is true
TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Mathematical Induction Important Questions 14

TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation

Telangana TSBIE TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material 9th Lesson Gravitation Textbook Questions and Answers.

TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material 9th Lesson Gravitation

Very Short Answer Type Questions

Question 1.
State the unit and dimension of universal gravitational constant (G).
Answer:
Units of G = N-m² / kg².
Dimensional formula = M-1 L³ T-2.

Question 2.
State the vector form of Newton’s law of gravitation.
Answer:
Vector form of Newton’s Law of gravitation is \(\overline{\mathrm{F}}=\frac{\mathrm{Gm}_1 \mathrm{~m}_2 \overline{\mathrm{r}}}{\overline{\mathbf{r}}^3}\)

Question 3.
If the gravitational force of the Earth on the Moon is F. What is the gravitational force of the moon on the earth? Do these forces form an action-reaction pair?
Answer:
Gravitational force between earth and moon and moon and earth are same
i-e., FEM = – FME

Gravitational force between the bodies are treated as action-reaction pair.

Question 4.
What would be the change in acceleration due to gravity (g) at the surface, if the radius of Earth decreases by 2% keeping the mass of Earth constant?
Answer:
Acceleration due to gravity, g = \(\frac{GM}{R^2}\)
When mass is kept as constant and radius
is decreased by 2% then \(\frac{\Delta \mathrm{R}}{\mathrm{R}}\) × 100 = 2

From distribution of errors in multiplications and divisions \(\frac{\Delta \mathrm{g}}{\mathrm{g}}\) × 100 = -2\(\frac{\Delta \mathrm{R}}{\mathrm{R}}\) × 100

% Change in g = – 2 × 2 = – 4% – ve sign indicates that when R decreases ‘g’ increases.

Question 5.
As we go from one planet to another, how will a) the mass and b) the weight of a body change?
Answer:

  1. As we go from one planet to another planet mass of the body does not change. Mass of a body is always constant.
  2. As we move from one planet to another planet weight of the body gradually decreases. It become weightless. When we approaches the other planet the weight will gradually increases.

TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation

Question 6.
Keeping the length of a simple pendulum constant, will the time period to be the same on all planets? Support your answer with reason.
Answer:
Even though length of pendulum / is same the time period of oscillation T value changes from planet to planet.
Time period of pendulum, T = 2π\(\sqrt{\frac{l}{g}}\)
i.e., T depends on l and g.

Acceleration due to gravity, (g = \(\frac{GM}{R^2}\)) changes from planet to planet.

Hence Time period of pendulum changes even though length ‘l’ is same.

Question 7.
Give the equation for the value of g at a depth ‘d’ from the surface of Earth. What is the value of ‘g’ at the centre of Earth?
Answer:
Acceleration due to gravity at a depth ‘d’ below the ground is, gd = g(1 – \(\frac{D}{R}\))
Acceleration due to gravity at centre of earth is zero. (Since D = R)

Question 8.
What are the factors that make ‘g’ the least at the equator and maximum at the poles?
Answer:
‘g’ is least at equator due to
1) The equatorial radius of earth is maximum ∵ g = \(\frac{GM}{R^2}\) (∵ R = maximum)

2) Due to rotation of earth centrifugal force will act on the bodies. It opposes gravitational pull of earth on the bodies. At equator centrifugal force is maximum. So ‘g’ value is least at equator.
The g’ ⇒ maximum at poles due to

1) The polar radius of earth is minimum
(∵ g = \(\frac{GM}{R^2}\))

2) Centrifugal force due to rotation of earth is zero at poles. This centrifugal force reduces earth’s gravitational pull.

Since Centrifugal force is zero, ‘g’ value is maximum at poles.

Question 9.
“Hydrogen is in abundance around the sun but not around earth”. Explain.
Answer:
The escape velocity on the sun is very high compared to that on the earth. The gravitational pull of the sun is very large because of its larger mass compared to that of the earth. So it is very difficult for hydrogen to escape from the Sun’s atmosphere. Hence hydrogen is abundant on sun.

Question 10.
What is the time period of revolution of a geostationary satellite? Does it rotate from West to East or from East to West?
Answer:
Time period of geostationary satellite is equal to time period of rotation of earth.

∴ Time period of geostationary orbit T = 24 hours. Satellites in geostationary orbit will revolve round the earth in west to east direction in an equatorial plane.

Derive the relation between acceleration due to gravity (g) at the surface of a planet and Gravitational constant (G).

Question 11.
What are polar satellites?
Answer:
Polar satellite :
Polar satellites are low altitude satellites. They will revolve around the poles of the earth in a north-south direction. Time period of polar satellites is nearly 100 minutes.

Short Answer Questions

Question 1.
State Kepler’s Laws of planetary motion. [TS Mar. ’17]
Answer:
Kepler’s Laws :
Law of orbits (1st law):
All planets will move in elliptical orbits with the sun lies at one of its foci.

Law of areas (2nd law) :
The line that joins any planet to the sun sweeps equal areas in equal intervals of time, i.e., \(\frac{\Delta \mathrm{A}}{\Delta \mathrm{T}}\)= constant. i.e., planets will appear to move slowly when they are away from sun, and they will move fast when they are nearer to sun.

Law of periods (3rd law) :
The square of time period of revolution of a planet is proportional to the cube of the semi major axis of the ellipse traced out by the planet.
i.e., T² ∝ R³ or \(\frac{T^2}{R^3}\) = constant

TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation

Question 2.
Derive the relation between acceleration due to gravity (g) at the surface of a planet and Gravitational constant (G).
Answer:
Relation between g and G :
Each and everybody was attracted towards centre of earth with some force. This is called weight of the body,
W = mg …………. (1)

This force is due to gravitational pull on the body by the earth.

For small distances above earth from centre of earth is equal to radius of earth ‘R’.

According to Newton’s law of gravitation.
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation 1

Question 3.
How does the acceleration due to gravity (g) change for the same values of height (h) and depth(d)?
Answer:
Variation of ‘g’ with altitude :
When we go to a height ‘h’ above the ground ‘g’ value decreases.
On surface of earth (g) = \(\frac{GM}{R^2}\)
At an altitude ‘h’ g(h) = \(\frac{GM}{(R+h)^{2}}\) because

R + h is the distance from centre of earth to the given point at ‘h’.
h << R ⇒ g(h) = g(1 – \(\frac{2h}{R}\))
So acceleration due to gravity decreases with height above the ground.

Variation of ‘g’ with depth :
When we go deep into the ground ‘g’ value decreases.

At a depth ‘d’ inside the ground mass of earth upto the point d from centre will exhibit force of attraction on the body. The remaining mass does not exhibit any influence. So effective radius is (R – d) only. Acceleration due to gravity ‘g’ at a depth ‘d’ is given by
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation 2

So ‘g’ value decreases with depth below the ground.

Question 4.
What is orbital velocity? Obtain an expression for it. [AP Mar. 17, 14; May 18. 14]
Answer:
Orbital velocity (V0) :
Velocity of a satellite moving in the orbit is called orbital velocityog.

Let a satellite of mass m is revolving round the earth in a circular orbit at a height ‘h’ above the ground.

Radius of the orbit = R + h where R is radius of earth.

In orbital motion is “The centrifugal and centripetal forces acting on the satellite”.

Centrifugal force = \(\frac{mV^2}{r}=\frac{mV^{2}_{0}}{R+h}\) ……… (1)
(In this case V = V0 and r = R + h)

Centripetal force is the force acting towards the centre of the circle it is provided by gravitational force between the planet and satellite.
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation 3

V0 = \(\sqrt{gR}\) is called orbital velocity. Its value is 7.92 km/sec.

TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation

Question 5.
What is escape velocity? Obtain an expression for it. [TS Mar. ’19, ’16; AP Mar. ’19. ’18, ’15, ’13. May ’17, ’16]
Answer:
Escape speed (v1)min :
It is defined as the minimum velocity required by a body to overcome gravitational field of earth is known as escape velocity.

For a body of mass ‘m’ gravitational potential energy on surface of earth PE = – \(\frac{G.m.M_E}{R_E}\)

For a body to escape from gravitational field of earth its kinetic energy must be equal or more than gravitational potential energy.
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation 4

Question 6.
What is a geostationary satellite? State [AP Mar. ’16, June ’15; May ’13; TS Mar. ’18, ’15, May ’18, ’16, June ’15]
Answer:
A geostationary satellite will always appears to be stationary relative to earth.

The time period of geostationary satellite is equals to time perfod of rotation of earth.

∴ Time period of geostationary orbit t = 24 hours. Satellites in geostationary orbit will revolve round the earth in west to east direction in an equatorial plane.

Uses of geostationary satellites:

  1. For study of the upper layers of the atmosphere.
  2. For forecasting the changes in atmosphere and weather.
  3. For finding the size and shape of earth.
  4. For investigating minerals and ores present in the earth’s crust.
  5. For transmission of T.V. signals.
  6. For study of transmission of radio waves.
  7. For space research.

Question 7.
If two places are at the same height from the mean sea level; One is a mountain and other is in air. At which place will ‘g’ be greater? State the reason for your answer.
Answer:
‘g’ value on the mountain is greater than g’ value in air even though both are at same height.

For a point on mountain while deciding the ‘g’ value, mass of mountain is also considered which leads to change in ‘g’ value depending on local condition such as concentration of huge mass at a particular place. Whereas for a point in air no such effect is considered. Hence ‘g’ on the top of mountain is more.

Question 8.
The weight of an object is more at the poles than at the equator. At which of these can we get more sugar for the same weight? State the reason for your answer.
Answer:
If we are using common balance to measure sugar we will get some quantity of sugar both at equator and at poles.

Whereas if we are using spring balance to weigh sugar then weight of sugar at poles is more. So we will get less quantity.

Weight of sugar at equator is less. So we will get more quantity of sugar at equator.

Question 9.
If a nut becomes loose and gets detached from a satellite revolving around the earth, will it fall down to earth or will it revolve around earth? Give reasons for your answer.
Answer:
If a nut is detached from a satellite revolving in the orbit then its velocity is equals to orbital velocity. So it continues to revolve in the same orbit. It does not fall to earth.

TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation

Question 10.
An object projected with a velocity greater than or equal to 11.2 km.s-1 will not return to earth. Explain the reason.
Answer:
Escape velocity of earth is 11.2 km/sec. If any body acquires a velocity of 11.2 km/ sec. or more its kinetic energy is more than gravitational potential energy. So earth is not able to stop the motion of that body. So any body with a velocity 11.2 km/s or more will escape from gravitational field of earth and never comes back to earth.

Long Answer Questions

Question 1.
Define gravitational potential energy and derive an expression for it associated with two particles of masses m1 and m2.
Answer:
Gravitational potential energy of a body at a point in a gravitational field of another. It is defined as the amount of work done in brining the given body from infinity to that point in the field is called Gravitational potential energy.

Expression for gravitational potential energy :
Consider two particles of masses m, and m2 are placed at the points O’ and p respectively. Let the distance between the two particles is r’ i.e., OP = r.
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation 5

Let us calculate the gravitational potential energy of the particle of mass m2 placed at point p in the gravitational field of m1. Join OP and extended it in forward direction. Consider two points A and B on this line such that OA = x and AB = dx.

The gravitational force of attraction on the particle at A is, F = \(\frac{\mathrm{Gm_1m_2}}{\mathrm{x^2}}\)

Small amount of work done in bringing the particle without acceleration through a very small distance AB is, dW = F dx
= \(\frac{\mathrm{Gm_1m_2}}{\mathrm{x^2}}\)

Total workdone in bringing the particle from infinity to the point P is,
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation 6

Since, this work done is stored in the particle as its gravitational potential energy (U). Therefore, gravitational potential energy of the particle of mass m2 placed at point p’ in the gravitational field of particle of mass
m1 at distance r is, U = \(\frac{\mathrm{-Gm_1m_2}}{\mathrm{r}}\)

Here, negative sign shows that the potential energy is due to attractive gravitational force between two particles.

Question 2.
Derive an expression for the variation of acceleration due to gravity (a) above and (h) below the surface of the Earth.
Answer:
Variation of acceleration due to gravity above the surface of earth :
We know ‘g’ on planet, g = \(\frac{GM}{R^2}\). But on earth g’ value changes with height above the ground h’.

Variation of ‘g’ with altitude :
For a point h’ above the earth total mass of earth seems to be concentrated at centre of earth. Now distance from centre of earth is (R + h).
Acceleration due to gravity at ‘h’ = g(h)
= \(\frac{GM_E}{(R_E+h)^2}\)

For small values of ‘h’ i.e., h << R than
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation 7

Variation of acceleration due to gravity below the surface of earth :
At a depth d’ inside the ground mass of earth upto the point d from centre will exhibit force of attraction on the body. The remaining mass does not exhibit any influence.
Mass of spherical body M ∝ R³

∴ MS/ME = (RE – d)³/ R³E where Ms is mass of earth’s shell upto a depth ‘d’ from centre. Gravitational force at depth ‘d’ is
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation 8
So ‘g’ value decreases with depth below the ground.

TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation

Question 3.
State Newton’s Universal Law of Gravitation. Explain how the value of the Gravitational constant (G) can be determined by Cavendish method.
Answer:
Newton’s law of gravitation :
Every body in the universe attracts every other body with a force which is directly proportional to theproduct of their masses and inversely proportional to the square of the distance between them.
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation 9

This is always a force of attraction and acts along the line joining the two bodies.

Cavendish experiment to find gravitational constant ‘G’ :
Cavendish experiment consists of a long metalic rod AB to which two small lead spheres of mass ‘m’ are attached.

This rod is suspended from a rigid support with the help of a thin wire. Two heavy spheres of mass M are brought near to these small spheres in opposite direction. Then gravitational force will act between the spheres.
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation 10

Force between the spheres, r = \(\frac{GMm}{d^2}\)

Two equal and opposite forces acting at the two ends of the rod AB will develop force couple and the rod will rotate through an angle ‘θ’.
∴ Torque on the rod F × L = \(\frac{GM.m}{d^2}\) → (1)
Restoring force couple = τθ → (2)
Where τ = Restoring couple per unit twist
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation 11
By measuring 0 we can calculate ‘G’ value when other parameters are known. Practical value of G is 6.67 × 10-11 Nm²/kg².

Problems

(Gravitational Constant ‘G’ = 6.67 × 10-11 Nm²kg-2; Radius of earth ‘R’ = 6400 km; Mass of earth ‘ME‘ = 6 × 1024 kg)

Question 1.
Two spherical balls each of mass 1 kg are placed 1 cm apart. Find the gravitational force of attraction between them.
Solution:
Mass of each ball, m = 1 kg;
Separation, r = 1 cm = 10-2 m
Gravitational force of attraction,
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation 12

Question 2.
The mass of a ball is four times the mass of another ball. When these balls are separated by a distance of 10 cm, the gravitational force between them is 6.67 × 10-7 N. Find the masses of the two balls.
Solution:
Mass of 1st ball = m;
Mass of 2nd ball = 4m.
Separation, r = 10 cm = 0.1 m;
Mass of the 1st ball = m = ?
Gravitational force, F = 6.67 × 10-7 N
∴ Mass of the balls are 5 kg, 20 kg.
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation 13

Question 3.
Three spherical balls of masses 1 kg, 2 kg and 3 kg are placed at the corners of an equilateral triangle of side 1 m. Find the magnitude of the gravitational force exerted by the 2 kg and 3 kg masses on the 1 kg mass.
Solution:
Side of equilateral triangle, a = lm.
Masses at corners = 1 kg, 2 kg, 3 kg.
Force between 1 kg, 2g = F1 = G.\(\frac{2\times1}{1^2}\) = 2 G
Force between I kg, 3kg = F2 = G.\(\frac{3\times1}{1^2}\)= 3G.
Now F1 & F2 act with an angle of 60°
∴ Resultant force
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation 14

Question 4.
At a certain height above the earth’s surface, the acceleration due to gravity is 4% of its value at the surface of the earth. Determine the height.
Solution:
Acceleration due.to gravity at a height, h = 4% of g.
Radius of earth, R = 6400K.M. = 6.4 × 106m.
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation 15

TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation

Question 5.
A satellite orbits the earth at a height of 1000 km. Find its orbital speed.
Solution:
Radius of earth, R = 6,400 km = 6.4 × 106 m;
Mass of earth, M = 6 × 1024
Height of satellite h = 1000 km;
G = 6.67 × 1011 N – m² /kg²
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation 16

Question 6.
A satellite orbits the earth at a height equal to the radius of earth. Find it’s (i) orbital speed and (ii) Period of revolution.
Solution:
Radius of earth, R = 6400 k.m.;
-height above earth, h = R.
Mass of earth, M = 6 × 1024
G = 6.67 × 10-11 N – m²/kg²
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation 17

Question 7.
The gravitational force of attraction between two objects decreases by 36% when the distance between them is increased by 4 m. Find the original distance between them.
Solution:
Let force between the objects = F;
Distance between them = r.
For Case II distance, r1 = (r + 4);
New force, F1 = 36% less than F
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation 18
⇒ 100 r² = 64 (r + 4)² Take square roots on both sides.
10r = 8 (r + 4) ⇒ 10 r = 8r + 32
⇒ (10 – 8) r = 2r = 32
∴ r = 16 m.

Question 8.
Four identical masses m are kept at the corners of a square of side a. Find the gravitational force exerted on one of the masses by the other masses.
Solution:
Given all masses are equal
∴ m1 = m2 = m3 = m4
Force between m1, m4 = F1 = \(\frac{G.m^2}{a^2}\) ……… (1)
Force between m4, m3 = F2 = \(\frac{G.m^2}{a^2}\) ……… (2)
Forces F1 and F2 act perpendicularly.
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation 19
Their magnitudes are equal.
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation 20

Now forces FR and F3 are like parallel. So resultant is sum of these forces.
Total force at m4 due to other masses
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation 21

Question 9.
Two spherical balls of 1 kg and 4 kg are separated by a distance of 12 cm. Find the distance of a point from the 1 kg mass at which the gravitational force on any mass becomes zero.
Solution:
Mass, m1 = 1 kg ; Mass, m2 = 4 kg ;
Separation, d = 12 cm
Mass of 3rd body m3 = ?
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation 22
For m3 not to experience any force the condition is
Force between m1, m3 = Force between m2, m3.
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation 23
Take square roots on both sides,
d – x = 2x ⇒ d = 3x or x = \(\frac{12}{3}\) = 4 cm
∴ Distance from 1 kg mass = 4 cm

Question 10.
Three uniform spheres each of mass m and radius R are kept in such a way that each touches the other two. Find the magnitude of the gravitational force on any one of the spheres due to the other two.
Solution:
Mass m and radius R are same for all spheres.
Force between 1, 3 spheres = F1 = \(\frac{G.m^2}{(2R)^2}\)
Force between 1, 2 spheres = F2 = \(\frac{G.m^2}{(2R)^2}\)
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation 24
Now F1 and F2 will act with an angle θ = 60° between them so from Parallelogram law
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation 25

TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation

Question 11.
Two satellites are revolving round the earth at different heights. The ratio of their orbital speeds is 2 : 1. If one of them is at a height of 100 km what is the height of the other satellite?
Solution:
Mass of earth, m = 6 × 1020 kg ;
G = 6.67 × 10-11 N-m² / kg²
Ratio of orbital velocities V01 : V02 = 2 : 1;
Height of one satellite, h = 100 k.m
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation 26

4R + 4h2 = R + h1 ⇒ h1 = 3R + 4h2. ;
Put h2 = 100 km
∴ h1 = 3 × 6400 + 400 = 19600 km.

Question 12.
A satellite is revolving round in a circular orbit with a speed of 8 km/ s-1 at a height where the value of acceleration due to gravity is 8 m/s-2. How high is the satellite from the Earth’s surface? (Radius of planet 6000 km.).
Solution:
Orbital velocity of satellite, V0 = 8 km/s.
= 8 × 10³ m/s.
Acceleration due to gravity in the orbit = g
= 8 m/s²

Orbital velocity, V = \(\sqrt{gR}\)
where R is radius of the orbit and g is acceleration due to gravity in the orbit.
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation 27

Height of satellite = 8000 – radius of earth ;
Radius of earth = 6000 km.
∴ Height above earth = 8000 – 6000
= 2000 km.

Question 13.
(a) Calculate the escape velocity of a body from the Earth’s surface, (b) If the Earth were made of wood, its mass would be 10% of its current mass. What would be the escape velocity, if the Earth were made of wood?
Solution:
Radius of earth, R = 6400 km = 6.4 × 106 m.
Mass of earth, M = 6 × 1024 kg; g = 9.8 ms-2.
a) Escape velocity, Ve = \(\sqrt{2gR}\)
∴ Ve = \(\sqrt{2\times9.8\times6.4\times10^6}\) = 11.2 km/s

b) If earth is made of wood mass,
M1 = 10% of M = 6 × 1023
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation 28

Additional Problems

Question 1.
A comet orbits the Sun in a highly elliptical orbit. Does the comet have a constant (a) linear speed (b) angular speed (c) angular momentum (d) kinetic energy (e) potential energy (f) total energy throughout its orbit? Neglect any mass loss of the comet when it comes very close to the Sun.
Solution:
A comet while going on elliptical orbit around the Sun has constant angular momentum and total energy at all locations but other quantities vary with locations.

Question 2.
A Saturn year is 29.5 times the earth year. How far is the Saturn from the sun if the earth is 1.5 × 108 km away from the sun? Solution:
Here, Ts = 29.5 Te; Re = 1.5 × 108 km; Rs = ?
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation 29

Question 3.
A body weighs 63 N on the surface of Earth. What is the gravitational force on it due to the Earth at a height equal to half the radius of the Earth?
Solution:
Weight of body = mg = 63 N
At height h, the value of g’ is given by,
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation 30

TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation

Question 4.
Assuming the earth to be a sphere of uniform mass density, how much would a body weigh half way down to the centre of earth if it weighed 250 N on the surface?
Solution:
Weight of body at a depth, d = mg’
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation 31

TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 8 Oscillations

Telangana TSBIE TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material 8th Lesson Oscillations Textbook Questions and Answers.

TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material 8th Lesson Oscillations

Very Short Answer Type Questions

Question 1.
Give two examples of periodic motion which are not oscillatory.
Answer:

  1. Motion of seconds hand of a watch.
  2. Motion of fan blades which are rotating with constant angular velocity ‘w’.

For these two cases, they have constant centrifugal acceleration which does not change with rotation so it is not considered

Question 2.
The displacement in S.H.M. is given by y = a sin (20t + 4). What is the displacement when it is increased by2π/ω?
Answer:
Displacement :
Displacement remains constant ; \(\frac{2 \pi}{\omega}\) = time period T. After a time (0
period T, there is no change in equation of S.H.M.
i.e. Y = A sin (20t + 4) = Y = A sin (201 + 4 + T)
∴ There is no change in change in displacement.

Question 3.
A girl is swinging seated in a swing. What is the effect on the frequency of oscillation if she stands?
Answer:
The frequency of oscillation (n) will increase because in the standing position, the location of centre of mass of the girl shift upwards. Due to it, the effective length of the swing decreases. As n ∝ \(\frac{1}{\sqrt{l}}\), therefore, n increases.

Question 4.
The bob of a simple pendulum is a hollow sphere filled with water. How will the period of oscillation change, if the water begins to drain out of the hollow sphere?
Answer:
When water begins to drain out of the sphere, the centre of mass of the system will first move down and then will come up to the initial position. Due to this the equivalent length of the pendulum and hence time period first increases, reaches a maximum value and then decreases till it becomes equal to its initial value.

Question 5.
The bob of a simple pendulum is made of wood. What will be the effect on the time period if the wooden bob is replaced by an identical bob of aluminum?
Answer:
The time period of a simple pendulum does not change, if the wooden bob is replaced by an identical bob of aluminium because the time period of a simple pendulum is independent of the material of the bob.

TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 8 Oscillations

Question 6.
Will a pendulum clock gain or lose time when taken to the top of a mountain?
Answer:
At higher altitudes i.e., on mountains the acceleration due to gravity is less as compared on the surface of earth. Since time period is inversely proportional to the square root of the acceleration due to gravity, the time period increases. The pendulum clock loses time on the top of a mountain.

Question 7.
What is the length of a simple pendulum which ticks seconds? (g = 9.8 ms-2) [AP Mar. ’18: TS Mar. ’15]
Answer:
In simple pendulum T = 2π\(\sqrt{\frac{l}{g}}\) or l = \(\sqrt{\frac{gt^2}{4\pi^2}}\)
For seconds pendulum T = 2s ⇒ t² = 4
∴ = \(\frac{9.8\times4}{4\pi^2}\) = 1 m (∴ π² nearly 9.8)

Question 8.
What happens to the time period of a simple pendulum if its length is increased upto four times?
Answer:
In simple pendulum Time period T ∝ √l
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 8 Oscillations 1
From the above equation time period is doubled.

Question 9.
A pendulum clock gives correct time at the equator. Will it gain or lose time if it is taken to the poles? If so, why?
Answer:
When a pendulum clock showing correct time at equator is taken to poles then it will gain time.

Acceleration due to gravity at poles is high. Time period of pendulum T = 2π\(\sqrt{\frac{l}{g}}\).

When g increases T decreases. So number of oscillations made in the given time increases hence clock gains time.

Question 10.
What fraction of the total energy is K.E when the displacement is one half of a amplitude of a particle executing S.H.M?
Answer:
Kinetic energy is equal to three fourth (i.e.,\(\frac{3}{4}\)) of the total energy, when the displacement is one-half of its amplitude.

Question 11.
What happens to the energy of a simple harmonic oscillator if its amplitude is doubled?
Answer:
Energy of a simple harmonic oscillator,
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 8 Oscillations 2
From the above equation, energy increases by four times.

TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 8 Oscillations

Question 12.
Can a simple pendulum be used in an artificial satellite? Give the reason
Answer:
No, this is because inside the satellite, there is no gravity, i.e., g = 0. As T = 2π\(\sqrt{\frac{l}{g}}\) where T = ∞ for g = 0. Thus, the simple pendulum will not oscillate.

Short Answer Questions

Question 1.
Define simple harmonic motion? Give two examples.
Answer:
Simple Harmonic Motion :
A body is said to be in S.H.M, if its acceleration is directly proportional to its displacement, acts opposite in direction towards a fixed point.

Examples:

  1. Projection of uniform circular motion on a diameter.
  2. Oscillations of simple pendulum with small amplitude.
  3. Oscillations of a loaded spring.
  4. Vibrations of a liquid column in U – tube.

Question 2.
Present graphically the variations of displacement, velocity and acceleration with time for a particle in S.H.M.
Answer:
The variations of displacement, velocity and acceleration with time for a particle in S.H.M can be represented graphically as shown in the figure.
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 8 Oscillations 3

From the graph

  1. All quantities vary sinusoidally with time.
  2. only their maxima differ and the different plots differ in phase.
  3. Displacement x varies between – A to A; v(t) varies from – ωA to ωA and a (t) varies from – ω²A to ω²A.
  4. With respect to displacement plot, velocity plot has a phase difference of \(\frac{\pi}{2}\) and acceleration plot has a phase difference of π.

TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 8 Oscillations

Question 3.
What is phase? Discuss the phase relations between displacement, velocity and acceleration in simple harmonic motion.
Answer:
Phase (θ) :
Phase is defined as its state or condition as regards its position and direction of motion at that instant.
In S.H.M phase angle, θ = ωt = 2π(\(\frac{t}{T}\))

a) Phase between velocity and displacement :
In S.H.M, displacement,
y = A sin (ωt – Φ)
Velocity, V = Aω cos (ωt – Φ)
So phase difference between displacement and velocity is 90°.

b) Phase between displacement and acceleration :
In S.H.M, acceleration ‘a’ = – ω²y
or y = A sin ωt and a = – ω² A sin ωt
– ve sign indicates that acceleration and displacement are opposite.

So phase difference between displacement and acceleration is 180°.

Question 4.
Obtain an equation for the frequency of oscillation of spring of force constant k to which a mass m is attached.
Answer:
Let a spring of negligible mass is suspended from a fixed point and mass m is attached as shown. It is pulled down by a small distance ‘x’ and allowed free it will execute simple harmonic oscillations.
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 8 Oscillations 4

Displacement from mean position = x.
The restoring forces developed are opposite to displacement and proportional to ‘x’. ∴ F ∝ – x or F = – kx where k is constant of spring, (-ve sign for opposite direction)
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 8 Oscillations 5

Question 5.
Derive expressions for the kinetic energy and potential energy of a simple harmonic oscillator.
Answer:
Expression for K.E of a simple harmonic oscillator :
The displacement of the body in S.H.M., X = A sin ωt
where A = amplitude, ωt = Angular displacement.

Velocity at any instant, v = \(\frac{dx}{dt}\) = Aω cos ωt
∴ K.E = \(\frac{1}{2}\) mv² = \(\frac{1}{2}\)mA²ω² cos² ωt
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 8 Oscillations 5
At mean position velocity is maximum and displacment x = 0
∴ K.Emax = \(\frac{1}{2}\)mA²ω²

Expression for P.E of a simple harmonic oscillator:
Let a body of mass m’ is in S.H.M with an amplitude A.
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 8 Oscillations 6

Let O is the mean position.
Equation of a body in S.H.M is given by, x = A sin ωt
For a body in S.H.M acceleration, a = – ω²Y
Force, F = ma = – mω²x
∴ Restoring force, F = mω²x

Potential energy of the body at any point say ‘x’ :
Let the body is displaced through a small distance dx
Work done, dW = F . dx = P.E.
This work done.
∴ P.E = mω²x. dx(where x is its displacement)
Total work done, W = ∫dW = \(\int_0^x m \omega^2 x\).dx
⇒ Work done, W = \(\frac{m\omega^2x^2}{2}\).
This work is stored as potential energy.
∴ P.E at any point = \(\frac{1}{2}\)mω²x²

Question 6.
How does the energy of a simple pendulum vary as it moves from one extreme position to the other during its oscillations?
Answer:
The total energy of a simple pendulum is,
E = \(\frac{1}{2}\)mA² (or) E = \(\frac{1}{2}\frac{mg}{l}\)A²

The above equation, shows that the total energy of a simple pendulum remains constant irrespective of the position at any time during the oscillation i.e., the law of conservation of energy is valid in the case of a simple pendulum. At the extreme positions P and Q the energy is completely in the form of potential energy and at the mean position 0 it is totally converted as kinetic energy.

At any other point the sum of the potential and kinetic energies is equal to the maximum kinetic energy at the mean position or maximum potential energy at the extreme position. As the bob of the pendulum moves from P to O, the potential energy decreases but appears in the same magnitude as kinetic energy. Similarly as the bob of the pendulum moves from 0 to P or Q, the kinetic energy decreases to the extent it is converted into potential energy, as shown in figure.
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 8 Oscillations 7

Question 7.
Derive the expressions for displacement, velocity and acceleration of a particle executes S.H.M.
Answer:
Displacement of a body in S.H.M.
X = A cos (ωt + Φ).

i) Displacement (x) :
At t = 0 displacement x = A i.e., at extreme position when ωt + Φ = 90° displacement x = 0 at mean position at any point x = A cos (ωt + Φ).

ii) Velocity (V): Velocity of a body in S.H.M.
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 8 Oscillations 8
When (ωt + Φ) = 0 then velocity v = 0. For points where (ωt + Φ) = 90°
Velocity V = – Aω i.e., velocity is maximum,

iii) Acceleration (a): Acceleration of a body in S.H.M. is a = \(\frac{dv}{dx}\)
= \(\frac{d}{dt}\)(-Aω sin(ωt + Φ) = -Aω²cos(ωt + Φ) = -ω²x)
amax = -ω²A

Long Answer Questions

Question 1.
Define simple harmonic motion. Show that the motion of projection of a particle performing uniform circular motion, on any diameter is simple harmonic. [TS May 18, Mar. 16, June 15; AP Mar. ;19, 18, AP May 16, 14]
Answer:
Simple harmonic motion :
A body is said to be in S.H.M, if its acceleration is directly proportional to its displacement, acts opposite in direction towards a fixed point.

Relation between uniform circular motion and S.H.M.:
Let a particle ‘P’ is rotating in a circular path of radius ‘ω’ with a uniform angular velocity ‘P’. After time ‘t’ it goes to a new position ‘P’. Draw normals from ‘P’ on to the X – axis and on to the Y – axis. Let ON and OM are the projections on X and Y axis respectively.

As the particle is in motion it will subtend an angle θ = ωt at the centre.
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 8 Oscillations 9

From triangle OPN
ON = OP cos θ
But OP = r and θ = ωt
∴ Displacement of particle P on X – axis at any time t is
X = r cos ωt ………… (1)
From triangle OPM
OM = Y = OP sin θ
But OP = r and θ = ωt
∴ Displacement of particle P on Y- axis is
Y = r sin ωt ………… (2)

As the particle rotates in a circular path the foot of the perpendiculars OM and ON will oscillate with in the limits X to X¹ and Y to Y¹.

At any point the displacement of particle P is given by OP² = OM² = ON²
Since OM = X = r cos ωt and ON = Y = r sin ωt.

So a uniform circular motion can be treated as a combination of two mutually perpendicular simple harmonic motions.

TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 8 Oscillations

Question 2.
Show that the motion of a simple pendulum is simple harmonic and hence derive an equation for its time period. What is a seconds pendulum? [TS Mar. 18, 17, 15, May 17, 16; AP Mar. 17, 16. 15, 14, 13; AP May 18. 17. 13; June 15]
Answer:
Simple pendulum :
Massive metallic bob is suspended from a rigid support with the help of inextensable thread. This arrangement is known as simple pendulum.
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 8 Oscillations 10

So length of simple pendulum is ‘l’. Let the pendulum is pulled to a side by a small angle ‘θ’ and released it oscillate about the mean position.

Let the bob is at one extreme position B. The weight (W = mg) of body acts vertically downwards.

By resolving the weight into two perpendicular components :

  1. One component mg sin θ is responsible for the to and fro motion of pendulum.
  2. Other component mg cos θ will balance the tension in the string.

Force useful for motion F = mg sin θ = ma (From Newton’s 2nd Law)
From the above equations
∴ a = g sin θ

Since acceleration is proportional to displacement and acceleration is always directed towards a fixed point the motion of simple pendulum is “simple harmonic”.

Time period of simple pendulum :
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 8 Oscillations 11
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 8 Oscillations 12

Seconds pendulum :
A pendulum whose time period is 2 seconds is called “seconds pendulum.”

Question 3.
Derive the equation for the kinetic energy and potential energy of a simple harmonic oscillator and show that the total energy of a particle in simple harmonic motion is constant at any point on its path.
Answer:
Expression for K.E of a simple harmonic oscillator :
The displacement of the body in S.H.M, X = A sin ωt
where A = amplitude and ωt = Angular displacement.

Velocity at any instant, v = \(\frac{dx}{dt}\) = Aω cos ωt
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 8 Oscillations 13

At mean position velocity is maximum and displacement x = 0
∴ K.Emax = \(\frac{1}{2}\)mA²ω²

Expression for P.E of a simple harmonic oscillator :
Let a body of mass’m’ is in S.H.M with an amplitude A.
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 8 Oscillations 14

Let O is the mean position.
Equation of a body in S.H.M is given by, x = A sin ωt
For a body in S.H.M acceleration, a = – ω²Y
Force, F = ma = – mω²x
∴ Restoring force, F = mω²x

Potential energy of the body at any point say ‘x’:
Let the body is displaced through
a small distance dx
⇒ Work done, dW = F . dx
This work done = RE. in the body
∴ P.E = mω²x. dx(where x is its displacement)
Total work done, W = ∫dW = \(\int_0^x m \omega^2 x\).dx
work done, W = \(\frac{m\omega^2 x^2}{2}\)
This work is stored as potential energy.
∴ P.E at any point = \(\frac{1}{2}\)ω²x²
For conservative force total Mechanical Energy at any point = E= P.E + K.E
∴ Total energy,
E = \(\frac{1}{2}\)mω²(A² – x²) + \(\frac{1}{2}\)mω²x²
E = \(\frac{1}{2}\)mω²{A² – x² + x²} = \(\frac{1}{2}\)mω²A²

So for a body in S.H.M total energy at any point of its motion is constant and equals to \(\frac{1}{2}\)mω²A²

Problems

Question 1.
The bob of a pendulum is made of a hollow brass sphere. What happens to the time period of the pendulum, if the bob is filled with water completely? Why?
Solution:
If the hollow brass sphere is completely filled with water, then time period of simple pendulum does not change. This is because time period of a pendulum is independent of mass of the bob.

TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 8 Oscillations

Question 2.
Two identical springs of force constant “k” are joined one at the end of the other On series). Find the effective force constant of the combination.
Solution:
When two springs of constant k each are joined together with end to end in series then effective spring constant k = \(\frac{k_1k_2}{k_1+k_2}\) in this case keq = \(\frac{k.k}{k+k}=\frac{k}{2}\)

In series combination, force constant of springs decreases.

Question 3.
What are the physical quantities having maximum value at the mean position in SHM?
Solution:
In S.H.M at mean position velocity and kinetic energy will have maximum values.

Question 4.
A particle executes SHM such that, the maximum velocity during the oscillation is numerically equal to half the maximum acceleration. What is the time period? [TS June ’15]
Solution:
Given maximum velocity, Vmax = \(\frac{1}{2}\) maximum acceleration (amax)
But Vmax = Aw and amax = ω² A
∴ Aω = \(\frac{1}{2}\) . Aω² ⇒ ω = 2
Time period of the body, T = \(\frac{2 \pi}{\omega}=\frac{2 \pi}{2}\)

Question 5.
A mass of 2 kg attached to a spring of force constant 260 Nm-1 makes 100 oscillations. What is the time taken?
Solution:
Mass attached, m = 2 kg ; Force constant, k = 260 N/m
∴ Time period of loaded spring, T = 2π\(\sqrt{\frac{m}{k}}\)
= 2π\(\sqrt{\frac{2}{260}}\) = 0.5509 sec
∴ Time for 100 oscillations = 100 × 0.551
= 55.1 sec

Question 6.
A simple pendulum in a stationary lift has time period T. What would be the effect on the time period when the lift (i) moves up with uniform velocity (ii) moves down with uniform velocity (iii) moves up with uniform acceleration ‘a’ (iv) moves down with uniform acceleration ‘a’ (v) begins to fall freely under gravity?
Solution:
i) When the lift moves up with uniform velocity i.e., a = 0, there would be no change in the time period of a simple pendulum.

ii) When the lift moves down with uniform velocity i.e., a = 0, there would be no change in the time period of a simple pendulum.

iii) When lift is moving up with acceleration ‘a’ then relative acceleration = g + a
∴ Time period, T = 2 π\(\sqrt{\frac{l}{g+a}}\) so when lift is moving up with uniform acceleration time period of pendulum in it decreases.

iv) When lift is moving down with acceleration ‘a’ time period, T = 2π\(\sqrt{\frac{l}{g-a}}\)
(g – a = relative acceleration of pendulum)
So time period of pendulum in the lift decreases.

v) If the lift falls freely, a = g then the time period of a simple pendulum becomes infinite.

TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 8 Oscillations

Question 7.
A particle executing SHM has amplitude of 4cm, and its acceleration at a distance of 1cm from the mean position is 3cms-2. What will its velocity be when it is at a distance of 2cm from its mean position?
Solution:
Amplitude, A = 4cm = 4 × 10-2m
Acceleration, a = 3cm/s² = 3 × 10-2 m/s²;
Displacement, y = 1cm = 10-2 m
∴ Angular velocity, ω = \(\sqrt{\frac{a}{y}}=\sqrt{\frac{3}{1}}=\sqrt{3}\)

To find velocity at a displacement of 2cm
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 8 Oscillations 15

Question 8.
A simple harmonic oscillator has a time period of 2s. What will be the change in the phase after 0.25 s after leaving the mean position?
Solution:
Time period, T = 2 sec; time, t = 0.25 sec
Phase difference after t sec = Φ = \(\frac{t}{T}\) × 2π
= \(\frac{0.25}{2}\) × 2π = \(\frac{2 \pi}{4}\) = 90°
For a phase of \(\frac{2 \pi}{4}\) starting from mean position the body will be at extreme position. (Phase difference between mean position and extreme position is \(\frac{2 \pi}{4}\) Rad or 90°)

Question 9.
A body describes simple harmonic motion with an amplitude of 5 cm and a period of 0.2 s. Find the acceleration and velocity of the body when the displacement is (a) 5 cm (b) 3 cm (c) 0 cm.
Solution:
Given that, A = 5 cm = 5 × 10-2m and T = 0.2 s
Angular velocity, ω = \(\frac{2 \pi}{T}=\frac{2 \pi}{0.2}\) = 10π rad s-1

a) Displacement, y = 5 cm = 5 × 10-2 m
i) Acceleration of the body, a = – ω²y
= -(10π)² × 5 × 10-2 = -5π²ms-2
ii) Velocity of the body,
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 8 Oscillations 16

b) Displacement, y = 3 cm = 3 × 10-2 m
i) Acceleration of the body, a = – ω²y
= -(10π)² × 3 × 10-2 = -3π²ms-2
ii) Velocity of the body, v = ω\(\sqrt{A^2 – y^2}\)
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 8 Oscillations 17
= 10π × 4 × 10-2 = 0.4π ms-1

c) Displacement, y = 0 cm
i) Acceleration of the body, a = – ω²y = 0
ii) Velocity of the body, v = ω\(\sqrt{A^2 – y^2}\)
= 10π^(5xl0’2)2-(0)2\(\sqrt{(5\times10^{-2})^2-(0)^2}\)
= 10π × 5 × 10-2 =0.5π ms-1

TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 8 Oscillations

Question 10.
The mass and radius of a planet are double that of the earth. If the time period of a simple pendulum on the earth is T, find the time period on the planet.
Solution:
Mass of planet, MP = 2 Me ;
Radius of planet, RP = 2Re
Time period of pendulum on earth = T ;
Time period on planet = T’
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 8 Oscillations 18

Question 11.
Calculate the change in the length of a simple pendulum of length lm, when its period of oscillation changes from 2 s to 1.5 s. [TS Mar. ’18]
Solution:
For seconds pendulum T1 = 2 sec ;
Length l1 = 1 m.
New time period T2 = 1.5 sec; Length l2 = ?
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 8 Oscillations 19

Question 12.
A freely falling body takes 2 seconds to reach the ground on a plane, when it is dropped from a height of 8m. If the period of a simple pendulum is seconds on the planet. Calculate the length of the pendulum.
Solution:
Height, h = 8m;
Time taken to reach the ground, t = 2 sec
But for a body dropped, t = \(\sqrt{\frac{2h}{g}}\)
⇒ 2 = \(\sqrt{\frac{16}{g}}\) ⇒ g = \(\frac{16}{4}\) = 4m/s² on that planet
Time period of pendulum, T = 2π\(\sqrt{\frac{l}{g}}\) = π
∴ 2\(\sqrt{\frac{l}{g}}\) = 1 or \(\frac{l}{g}=\frac{1}{4}\) ⇒ l = \(\frac{g}{4}\)
Length of pendulum = \(\frac{4}{4}\) = 1m = 100cm on that planet

Question 13.
Show that the motion of a simple pendulum is simple harmonic and hence derive an equation for its time period.
Find the length of a simple pendulum which ticks seconds, (g = 9.8 ms-2) [AP Mar. ’18. ’16, ’15, May ’17, June ’15; TS Mar.’17, 15, May 17]
Solution:
Simple pendulum :
In a laboratory a heavy metallic bob is suspended from a rigid support with the help of a spunless thread. This arrangement is known as “simple pendulum”.

Let the length of simple pendulum is ‘l’ and the point of suspension is ‘S’. Let the pendulum is drawn to a side by a small angle ‘θ’ and allowed free to oscillate in the vertical plane. Then it will oscillate between the extreme positions A and B with a displacement say ‘x’ at any given time.

Let the bob is at one extreme position say B. The force vertically acting downwards is Weight W = mg.
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 8 Oscillations 20

By resolving the weight into two per-pendicular components:

  1. The component mg sin θ is responsible for the to and fro motion of the bob.
  2. The component mg cos θ will balance the tension in the string.

Force useful for motion F = mg sin θ
= ma (From Newton’s 2nd Law)
∴ a = g sin θ
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 8 Oscillations 21

Since acceleration is proportional to displacement and acceleration is always directed towards a fixed point the motion of simple pendulum is “simple harmonic”.

Time period of simple pendulum :
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 8 Oscillations 22

Problem:
In simple pendulum T = 2π\(\sqrt{\frac{l}{g}}\) or l = \(\frac{gt^2}{4\pi^2}\)
For seconds pendulum T = 2s ⇒ t² = 4
∴ l = \(\sqrt{\frac{9.8\times4}{4\pi^2}}\) = 1 m (∴ π² nearly 9.8)

Question 14.
The period of a simple pendulum is found to increase by 50% when the length of the pendulum is increased by 0.6 m. Calculate the initial length and the initial period of oscillation at a place where g = 9.8 m/s².
Solution:
a) Increase in length of pendulum = 0.6m ;
Increase in time period = 50% = 1.5T
Let original length of pendulum = 1
Original time period = T; g = 9.8 m/s².
For 1st case 9.8 = π² \(\frac{1}{T^2}\) → 1 ;
For 2nd case l1 = (l + 0.6), T1 = 1.5 T
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 8 Oscillations 23
But l1 = l + 0.6 ;
∴ l + 0.6 = 2.25l ⇒ 0.6 = 1.25l
∴ Length of pendulum l = \(\frac{0.6}{1.25}\) = 0.48 m
b) Time period T = 2π\(\sqrt{\frac{l}{g}}\)
= 2 × 3.142\(\sqrt{\frac{0.48}{9.8}}\) = 6.284 × 0.2213
= 1.391 sec.

Question 15.
A clock regulated by a seconds pendulum keeps correct time. During summer the length of the pendulum increases to 1.02m. How much will the clock gain or lose in one day?
Solution:
Time period of seconds pendulum,
T = 2 sec
Length of seconds pendulum,
L = gT² / 4π² = 0. 9927 m
Length of seconds pendulum during summer = 1.02 m
∴ Error in length, ∆l = 1.02 – 1 = 0.0273
In pendulum T × √l. From principles of error
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 8 Oscillations 24

Question 16.
The time period of a body suspended from a spring is T. What will be the new time period, if the spring is cut into two equal parts and (i) the mass is suspended from one part? (ii) the mass is suspended simultaneously from both the parts?
Solution:
Time period of spring, T = 2π\(\sqrt{\frac{m}{K}}\)
When a spring is cut into two equal parts force constant of each part K1 = 2K
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 8 Oscillations 25

ii) When mass is suspended simultaneously from two parts ⇒ they are connected in parallel. For springs in parallel Kp = K1 – K2 = 4K
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 8 Oscillations 26

TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 8 Oscillations

Question 16.
What is the length of a seconds pendulum on the earth? [AP Mar. ’17, ’16; June ’15; TS Mar. ’17]
Solution:
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 8 Oscillations 27

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry

Telangana TSBIE TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Lesson 3(a) Electro Chemistry Textbook Questions and Answers.

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Lesson 3(a) Electro Chemistry

Very Short Answer Questions (2 Marks)

Question 1.
What is a galvanic cell or a voltaic cell ? Give one example.
Answer:
The cell that converts the chemical energy liberated during the redox reaction to electrical energy and exhibits an electrical potential is called galvanic cell or voltaic cell.
Ex : Daniel cell.

Question 2.
Write the chemical reaction used in the construction of the Daniel cell together with the half- cell reactions.
Answer:
In the Daniel cell the following redox reaction occurs.
Zn (s) + Cu2+ (aq) → Zn2+ (aq) + Cu (s)

The reaction is a combination of the two half reactions whose addition gives the overall cell reaction.

  1. Cu2+ (aq) + 2e → Cu (s) (reduction half reaction)
  2. Zn (s) → Zn2+ (aq) + 2e (oxidation half reaction)

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry

Question 3.
Name the two half-cell reactions that are taking place In the Daniel cell.
Answer:
The two half cell reactions that are taking place in the Daniel cell are as follows.

  1. Cu2+(aq) + 2e → Cu (s) (reduction half reaction)
  2. Zn (s) → Zn2+ (ag) + 2e (oxidation half reaction)

Question 4.
How is a galvanic cell represented on paper as per IUPAC convention ? Give one example.
Answer:
As per the IUPAC convention the anode is written on the left and the cathode on the right while representing the galvanic cell on paper. A galvanic cell is generally repre-sented by putting a vertical line in between the symbol of the metal (electrode) and formula of the electrolyte in the solution and putting a double vertical line in between the solutions (two electrolyte solutions). This indicates the connecting salt bridge (double vertical lines indicates salt bridge)
Examples: Zn (s) | Zn2+ (aq) || Cu2+ (aq) | Cu

Question 5.
Write the cell reaction taking place in the cell.
Cu(S) | Cu2+(aq) || Ag+ (aq) | Ag(S)
Answer:
As per the IUPAC convention the left hand side electrode is anode and right hand side electrode is cathode. At anode oxidation takes place while at cathode reduction takes place. These reactions can be shown as follows.
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry 62

Question 6.
What is standard hydrogen electrode?
Answer:
Standard hydrogen electrode is used as reference electrode. Its potential was arbit-rarily fixed as zero. It consists of a platinum electrode coated with platinum black. The electrode is dipped in a solution of acid (us-ually 1M HCO and pure H2 gas is bubbled through it at atmospheric pressure (or 1 bar). The concentration of H+ is unity (1M).

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry

Question 7.
Give a neat sketch of standard hydrogen electrode
Answer:
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry 1

Question 8.
What is Nernst equation? Write the equation for an electrode With electrode reaction
Mn+ (aq) + ne \(\rightleftharpoons\) M(s).
Answer:
The value of electrode potential changes with the variation in the concentration of the ions. The equation which shows the relationship between the concentration of ions and electrode potentials is known as Nernst equation.
The Nernst equation for the electrode with electrode reaction
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry 2
R = Gas constant (8.314 JK-1 mol-1)
F = Faraday constant (96487 C mol-1)
T = Temperature in θ kelvin scale [Mn+] is the concentration of the species Mn+.

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry

Question 9.
A negative Eθ indicates that the redox couple is… reducing couple than H+ / H2, couple, (powerful or weak)
Answer:
Powerful.
More the negative reduction potential stronger the reducing agent.

Question 10.
A positive Eθ indicates that the redox couple is a weaker … couple than H+ / H2 couple. (oxidising or reducing)
Answer:
Oxidising.

More positive Eθ indicates stronger oxidation property while more negative Eθ indicates stronger reducing property.

Question 11.
Write the Nernst equation for the EMF of the cell
Ni (s) / Ni2+ (aq) / / Ag+ (aq) / Ag
Answer:
The cell reaction is
Ni (s) + 2Ag+ (aq) → Ni2+ (aq) + 2Ag (s),
The Nernst equation is written as
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry 3
R = Gas constant 8.3 14 JK mol-1
F = Faraday constant 96487 C mol-1
T = Temperature in kelvin scale

Question 12.
Write the cell reaction for which Ecell =
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry 4
Answer:
Mg(s) + 2Ag+ (aq) → Mg2+ (aq) + 2Ag (s).

Question 13.
How is Eθ cell related mathematically to the equilibrium constant Kc of the cell reaction?
Answer:
\(\mathrm{E}_{\text {cell }}^\theta\) is related mathematically to equilibrium constant Kc as follows.
\(\mathrm{E}_{\text {cell }}^\theta\) = \(\frac{2.303 \mathrm{RT}}{\mathrm{nF}}\) log KC
R = Gas constant 8.3 14 JK mol-1
F = Faraday constant 96487 C mol-1
T = Temperature in kelvin scale
Kc = Equilibrium constant

Question 14.
How is Gibbs energy (G) related to the
Answer:
The emf of the cell E is related to Gibbs energy (G) as follows
ΔrG = -nFEcell
ΔrG = Gibbs energy
n = number of electrons Involved in the reaction
F = Faraday constant 96487 C mol-1
Ecell = cell emf

Question 15.
Define conductivity of a material. Give its SI units.
Answer:
Conductivity is the reciprocal of resistivity. It may also be defined as the conductance of one centimetre cube of the conductor. It is generally denoted by a Greek letter Kappa(K)
k = \(\frac{1}{\rho}\) = \(\frac{1}{\mathrm{R}}\left(\frac{l}{a}\right)\)
Units: The units of conductivity in SI units is S m-1 or Ω-1 m-1.
Where S = Siemen

Question 16.
What is cell constant of a conductivity cell?
Answer:
In a conductivity cell the resistance of solution is given by the equation
R = \(\rho \frac{l}{A}\) = \(\frac{l}{\mathrm{KA}}\)
The quantity l/A is called cell constant denoted by the symbol G.

Question 17.
Define molar conductivity \(\Lambda_m\) and how is it related to conductivity (K)?
Answer:
Molar conductivity is defined as the conductance of a solution kept between the electrodes at unit distance apart and having area of cross – section large enough to accommodate sufficient volume of the solution that contains one mole of electrolyte. It is denoted by the symbol \(\Lambda_m\).
The molar conductivity \(\Lambda_m\) and conductivity K are related as
K = \(\frac{\Lambda_{\mathrm{m}}}{\mathrm{V}}\) (or) \(\Lambda_m\) = KV
V is the volume containing one mole of electrolyte.

Question 18.
Give the mathematical equation which gives the variation of molar conductivity \(\Lambda_m\) with the molarity (c) of the solution.
Answer:
The mathematical equation that gives the variation of molar conductivity \(\Lambda_m\) with the molaritý (c) of the solution is as follows. \(\Lambda_m\) (S cm2 mol-1)
= \(\frac{\mathrm{K}\left(\mathrm{S} \mathrm{cm}^{-1}\right)}{1000 \mathrm{~L} \mathrm{~m}^{-3} \times \text { molarity }\left(\mathrm{mol} \mathrm{L}^{-1}\right)}\)
If we use S cm-1 as the units for K and mol cm-3, the units of concentration, then the units for \(\Lambda_m\) are S cm2 mol-1. It can be calculated by using the equation
\(\Lambda_m\) (S cm2 mol-1)
= \(\frac{\mathrm{K}\left(\mathrm{S} \mathrm{cm}^{-1}\right) \times 1000\left(\mathrm{~cm}^3 / \mathrm{L}\right)}{\text { molarity }(\mathrm{mol} / \mathrm{L})}\)

Question 19.
State Kohlrausch’s law of independent migration of ions.
Answer:
The Kohlrausch’s law of independent migra-tion of ions states that “limiting molar con-ductivity of an electrolyte can be represented as the sum of the individual contributions of the anion and the cation of the electrolyte”.

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry

Question 20.
State Faraday’s first law of electrolysis. (AP Mar. 18, 16; TS 15; IPE 14)
Answer:
The amount of chemical reaction which occurs at any electrode during electrolysis is proportional to the quantity of current passing through the electrolyte (solution or melt). *
W ∝ Q

Question 21.
State Faraday’s second law of electrolysis. (Mar. 2018-TS, IPE 14)
Answer:
The amounts of different substances liberated, when the same quantity of current is passing through the electrolyte solution are proportional to their chemical equivalent weight (Atomic mass of metal ÷ number of electrons required to reduce the cation).
Mathematically: \(\frac{W_1}{W_2}=\frac{E_1}{E_2}\)

Question 22.
What are the products obtained at the platinum anode and the platinum cathode respectively in the electrolysis of fused
or molten NaCl?
Answer:
Electrolysis of fused or molten NaCl gives chlorine gas at anode and sodium metal at
cathode.
NaCl → Na+ + Cl
2C → Cl2 (g) + 2e at anode
Na+ + e → Na (s) at cathode

Question 23.
Give the products obtained at the platinum electrodes (cathode and anode) when aqueous solution of K2 SO4 is electrolysed.
Answer:
In aqueous solution of K2SO4 the following reactions occur
K2SO4 → 2K+ + \(\mathrm{SO}_4^{2-}\)
The reactions taking place during electrolysis are
2H2O → O2 + 4H+ + 4e at anode.
4H2O + 4e → 2H2 + 4OH at cathode.
So at anode oxygen gas and at cathode hydrogen gas will be liberated,

Question 24.
Write the chemical equation corresponding to the oxidation of H2O(l) at the platinum anode.
Answer:
2H2O → O2 + 4H+ + 4e at Pt anode.

Question 25.
Give the chemical equation that represents the reduction of liquid water H2O(l) at the platinum cathode.
Answer:
4H2O + 4e → 2H2(g) + 4OH at Pt cathode.

Question 26.
What is a primary battery? Give one example. (AP 17)
Answer:
Primary batteries are the type óf batteries which become dead over a period of time and chemical reaction stops. They cannot be recharged or used again some common examples are dry cell, mercury cell etc.

Question 27.
Give one example for a secondary battery. Give the cell reaction.
Answer:
The most familiar example of secondary battery is lead storage battery.
Anode reaction
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry 5

Question 28.
Give the cell reaction of nickel – cadmium secondary battery.
Answer:
The overall reaction of nickel – cadmium secondary battery is
Cd (s) + 2 Ni (OH)3 (s) → CdO (s) + 2Ni (OH)2 (s) + H2O (l)

Question 29.
What is a fuel cell ? How is it different from a coventional galvanic cell ?
Answer:
Galvanic cells that are designed to convert the energy of combustion of fuels like hydrogen, methane, methanol, etc. directly into electrical energy are called fuel cells.
Galvanic cells directly convert chemical energy into electricity. In fuel cells reactants are fed continuously to the electrodes and products are removed contionuously from the electrolyte compartment.

Question 30.
Give the electrode reactions occurring at the anode and at the cathode in H2, O2 fuel cell.
Answer:
The electrode reactions occurring at the anode and at the cathode in H2, O2 fuel cell are as follows.
Cathode O2 (g) + 2H2O (l) + 4e → 4OH (aq)
Anode 2H2 (g) + 4OH (aq) → 4H2O (l) + 4e
The overall reaction is
2H2 (g) + O2 (g) → 2H2O (l)

Question 31.
What is metallic corrosion ? Give one example.
Answer:
Corrosion may be defined as the process of slow conversion of metals into their unde-sirable compounds (usually oxides) by rea-ction with moisture and other gases present in the atmosphere.
Examples: The rusting of iron (iron oxide), tarnishing of silver (silver sulphide) deve-lopment of green coating on copper (copper carbonate).

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry

Question 32.
Give the electro -chemical reaction that represents the corrosion or rusting of iron.
Answer:
Oxidation of iron takes place at one spot and that spot behaves as anode and the reaction is
Anode 2 Fe (s) → 2Fe2+ + 4e
Electrons released at anodic spot move through the metal and go to another spot on the metal and reduce oxygen at it in presence of H+. This spot behaves as cathode.
Cathode O2 (g) + 4H+ (aq) + 4e → 2H2O (s)
The overall reaction is
2Fe (s) + O2 (g) + 4H+ (aq) → 2Fe2+ (aq) + 2H2O (l).

Short Answer Questions (4 Marks)

Question 33.
What are galvanic cells? Explain the work-ing of a galvanic cell with a neat sketch taking Daniell cell as example. (Mar. 2018 – AP & TS)( AP & TS ’15)
Answer:
The device in which chemical energy is converted into electrical energy is called galvanic cell or electrochemical cell or voltaic cell. In a galvanic cell, a redox reaction is carried in an indirect manner and the decrease in free energy during the chemical process is made to appear as electrical energy.

In the Daniell cell a zinc strip is dipped in the ZnSO4 solution and a copper strip is dipped in the CuSO4 solution taken in separate beakers. The two metallic strips which act as electrodes are connected by the conducting wires through Voltmeter. The two solutions are joined by an inverted U – tube known as salt bridge which contain an electrolyte such as KCl, KNO3 or NH4Cl along with gelatin or agar – agar to convert the electrolyte into semi solid paste.
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry 6

The working of the cell can be understand by the following steps.

  1. Zinc undergoes oxidation to form zinc ions.
    Zn (s) → Zn2+ (aq) + 2e oxidation
  2. The electrons liberated during oxidation are pushed through the connecting wires to copper strip.
  3. Copper ions move towards copper strip, pick up the electrons and get reduced to copper atoms which are deposited at the copper strip.
    Cu2+ (aq) + 2e → Cu (s) Reduction.

The transference of electrons from anode (oxidation) electrode i.e., zinc ele-ctrode) to cathode (reduction electrode i.e., copper electrode) leads to flow of electric current.

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry

Question 34.
Give the construction and working of a standard hydrogen electrode with a neat diagram.
Answer:
The hydrogen electrode consists of platinum electrode coated with platinum black. The electrode is dipped in a solution of acid (us-ually 1M HCl) and pure H2 gas is bubbled through it, at atmospheric pressure (or 1 bar). The concentration of H+ is unity (1M). For this electrode the potential is arbitrarily fixed as zero. This is known as standard hydrogen electrode. It can be represented as.
Pt (s) | H2 (g) | H+ (aq)
Its potential value is zero volts at all temperatures.
The potential corresponds to the reaction.
H+ (aq) + e → \(\frac{1}{2}\)H2(g)
This is called standard hydrogen electrode.
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry 7
At 298 K the standard hydrogen electrode (SHE) is connected to another half cell and the emf of the cell (SHE II second half cell) gives the reduction potential of the other half cell. If the concentrations of the oxidised and the reduced forms of the species in the right hand half – cell are unity, then the cell emf is equal to standard electrode potential \(\mathrm{E}_{\mathrm{R}}^\theta\) of the given half cell.

Question 35.
State and explain Nernst equation with the help of a metallic electrode and a non metallic electrode.
Answer:
The equation that gives the quantitative relationship between the concentration of ions and electrode potentials is given by Nernst equation. For a general metallic electrode reaction.
Mn+ (aq) + ne → M (s)
The Nernst equation can be written as
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry 8
but the concentration of solid M is taken as unity
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry 9

R is gas constant (8.314 JK-1 mol-1), F is Faraday constant (96487 C mol-1), T is tem-perature in kelvin scale and [Mn+] is the concentration of the species Mn+. For a general non metallic electrode reaction.
X(g) + ne → Xn-(g).
The Nernst equation can be written as
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry 10
But the concentration of gareous X is taken as unity
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry 11

Question 36.
Explain with a suitable example the relation between the Gibbs energy of chemical reaction (G) and the functioning of the electrochemical cell.
Answer:
Electrical work done in one second in an electro chemical cell is equal to the electrical potential multiplied by the total charge passing. 1f we want to obtain maximum work from a galvanic cell then the charge has to be passed reversibly. The reversible work done by a galvanic cell is equal to decrease in its Gibbs by a galvanic cell is equal to decrease in its Gibbs energy and therefore, if the emf of the cell is E and nF is the amount of charge passing and ΔrG is the Gibbs energy of the reaction, then
ΔrG = -nF Ecell
Ecell is an intensive parameter but ΔrG is an extensive thermodynamic propery and the value depends on n. Eg: For the reaction
Zn (s) + Cu2+ (aq) () Zn2+ (aq) + Cu (s)
ΔrG = -2F Ecell
If the concentration of each of the reacting species is unity then Ecell = -nF \(\mathrm{E}^\theta \text { cell }\) and we have
ΔrG θ = -nF \(\mathrm{E}_{\mathrm{cel}}^\theta\)

Question 37.
On what factors the electrical conductance of an aqueous solution of electrolyte depends ?
Answer:
The conductivity of electrolytic (ionic) solutions depend on

  1. the nature of the electrolyte.
  2. size and solvation of the ions formed in the dissociation of the electrolyte.
  3. the nature and viscocity of the solvent.
  4. concentration of the electrolyte.
  5. temperature (conductivity increases with increase in temperature).

Question 38.
How is molar conductivity of an aqueous electrolyte solution measured experimen-tally?
Answer:
The conductance of the solution is reciprocal of Its resistance. Therefore, if resistance of the solution is known, its conductance can be easily calculated. The resistance of the electrolytic solution is measured with the help of wheatstone bridge method. Its arrangement is shown in the following fig.
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry 12

The setup consists of two resistances R3 and R4, a variable resistance R1 and the conductivity cell having solution of unknown resistance R2. An oscillator O (a source of a.c. power in the audio frequency range 550 to 5000 cycles per second) is connected to the bridge. P is a detector of null point (a head phone or an electronic device) and the bridge is balanced when no current passes through the detector. Under these conditions.
Unknown resistance R2 = \(\frac{\mathrm{R}_1 \mathrm{R}_4}{\mathrm{R}_3}\)
Once the cell constant and the resistance of the solution in the cell are determined the conductivity of the solution is given by the equation
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry 13
Molar conductivity \(\Lambda_{\mathrm{m}}\) = \(\frac{\mathrm{K}}{\mathrm{C}}\)

Question 39.
Explain the variation of molar conductivity with the change In the concentration of the electrolyte. Give reasons.
Answer:

  1. Molar conductivity (\(\Lambda_{\mathrm{m}}\)) values of strong electrolytes is larger than those of weak electrolytes for the same concentration.
  2. Molar conductivity of electrolytes, generally increase with dilution.
  3. Relative increase in the value of \(\Lambda_{\mathrm{m}}\) for strong electrolyte is quite small as com-pared to that for weak electrolytes.

The degree of ionisatloñ of weak electrolytes is less in aqueous solutions. So their \(\Lambda_{\mathrm{m}}\) values are less. As the dilution increases the degree of ionisation of weak electrolyte also increases causing more and more ionisation. As a result the value of Am also increases significantlý.

Strong electrolytes ionise almost completely in aqueous solutions at all concentrations. Hence the values of their \(\Lambda_{\mathrm{m}}\) are generally high even at high concentrations. However in concentrated solutions of strong electrolytes there will be significant inter – ionic interactions which reduce the velocity of ions causing lower \(\Lambda_{\mathrm{m}}\) values. On increasing dilution, ions move away and inter ionic attractions decrease resulting in the increase iñ \(\Lambda_{\mathrm{m}}\) values.

Question 40.
State and explain Kohlrausch’s law of independent inigration of ions.
Answer:
Kohlrausch’s law of independent migration of ion states that at infine dilution when the dissociation of electrolyte is complete, each ion makes a definite contribution towards the molar conductivity of electrolyte, irrespective of the nature of the other ion with which it is associated.

Thus the molar conductivity of an ele-ctrolyte at infinite dilution can be expressed as the sum of the contributions from its individual ions. If \(\lambda_{+}^{\circ}\) and \(\lambda_{-}^0\) represent the limiting molar conductivities of cation and anion respectively, Then the limiting molar conductivity of electrolyte at infinite dilution \(\Lambda_{\mathrm{m}}^{\circ}\), is given by
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry 14
Where v+ and v represent the number of positive and negative ions furnished by each formula unit of the electrolyte.

For example.

  1. once formula unit of NaCl furnishes one Na+ and one Cl ion, therefore
    TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry 15
  2. one formula unit of BaCl2 furnishes one Ba2+ and two Cl ions, therefore.
    TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry 16

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry

Question 41.
What is electrolysis? Give Faraday’s first law of electrolysis. (AP 15))
Answer:
The process of chemical decomposition of the electrolyte by the passage of electricity through its molten or dissolved state is called electrolysis.

Faraday’s first law of Electrolysis : This law states that ‘The mass of a substance liberated at the electrode is directly pro-portional to the quantity of electricity passed through the electrolyte.
m ∝ Q(or) m ∝ I × t (or) m = Z × I × t
Here Q = quantity of electricity
I = current in amperes
t = time in seconds
Z = constant of proportionality called electrochemical equivalent
If I = 1 ampere and t = 1 second then m = Z.

Thus the electrochemical equivalent of a substance is the amount of substance liber-ated at the electrode when current of one ampere is passed through the electrolyte for one second.

Question 42.
What are the products obtained at the cathode and the anode during the electrolysis of the following when platinum electrodes are used in the electrolysis.
a) Molten KCl
b) Aq. CuSO4 solution
c) Aq. K2SO4 solution
Answer:
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry 17

Question 43.
What are primary and secondary batteries? Give one example for each. (AP Mar. 19)
Answer:
Primary batteries are those which become dead over a period and the chemical reaction stops. They cannot be recharged or used again. Ex: Dry cell which is a compact form of Leclanche cell.
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry 18
The cell consists of zinc container and acts as the anode. The cathode is a carbon (graphite) rod surrounded by powdered manganese dioxide and carbon. The space between the electrodes is filled by a moist paste of ammonium chloride and zinc chloride. The electrode reactions are as follows.
Anode Zn (s) → Zn2+ + 2e
Cathode MnO2 + \(\mathrm{NH}_4{ }^{+}\) + e → MnO(OH) + NH3

A secondary cell after its use can be recharged an can be used again.
Example : Lead storage battery. It consists of lead anode and a grid of lead packed with lead dioxide (PbO2) as cathode. A 38% solution of sulphuric acid is used as electrolyte. The cell reactions are
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry 19
The overall reaction is
Pb (s) + PbO2(s) + 2H2SO4 (aq) → PbSO4 (s) + 2H2O
These reactions occur during discharge of the battery on charging the above reaction is reversed.

Question 44.
What are fuel cells ? How are they different from galvanic cells ? Give the construction of H2, O2 fuel cell.
Answer:
The cells which convert chemical energy of a fuel directly into electrical energy are called fuel cells. These are the Voltaic cells in which the fuels such as H2, CO, CH4, C8H8 etc. are used to generate electrical energy.

Galvanic cells convert the chemical energy liberated during the redox reaction to electrical energy. The emf of the galvanic cell is more if the intensity of the redox reaction is more. As the time proceeds the intensity of the redox reaction goes on decreasing and the cell becomes dead over a period of time when the cell reaction is completed. In fuel cells the reactants are fed continuously to the electrodes and products are removed continuously from the electrolyte compartment so that electrical energy is produced continuously.
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry 20
In hydrogen fuel cell hydrogen and oxygen are bubbled through porous carbon electrodes placed in concentrated aqueous sodium hydroxide solution. Catalysts like finely divided platinum or palladium is incorporated into the electrodes for increasing the rate of electrode reactions. The electrode reactions are as follows.
Cathode : O2 (g) + 2H2O (l) + 4e,sup>- → 4OH (aq)
Anode: 2H2 (g) + 4OH (aq) → 4H2O (l) + 4e
The overall reaction
2H2 (g) + O2 (g) → 2H2O (l)

Question 45.
What is metallic corrosion ? Explain it with respect to iron corrosion.
Answer:
Corrosion is a process of slow conversion of metals into oxides or other salts of the metal, generally the same as the compounds of their compounds by reaction with moisture and other gases present in the atmosphere.
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry 21
Oxidation : Fe (s) → Fe2+ (aq) + 2e
Reduction: O2 (g) + 4H+ (aq) + 4e → 2H2O (1)
Atomospheric oxidation: 2Fe2+ (aq) + 2H2O (1) + 1/2O2 (g) → Fe2O3 (s) + 4H+ (aq)

Corrosion of iron is known as rusting. It occurs in presence of water and air. The corrosion of iron may be considered essentially as an electro chemical phenomenon. At a particular spot of an object made of iron, oxidation takes place and that spot behaves as anode. The reaction is
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry 22

Long Answer Questions (8 Marks)

Question 46.
What are electro chemical cells ? How are they constructed ? Explain the working of the different types of galvanic cells.
Answer:
The device in which chemical energy is converted into electrical energy is called galvanic cell or electrochemical cell or voltaic cell.

In a galvanic cell, a redox reaction is carried out in an indirect manner and the decrease in free energy during the chemical process is made to appear as electrical energy. The indirect redox reaction is such that reduction and oxidation processes are carried out in separate vessels. The working of different types of galvanic cells can be understand by considering the Zn – CuSO4 reaction as the basis of the cell reaction.
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry 23
A zinc strip is dipped in zinc sulphate solution and a copper strip is dipped in copper sulphate solution taken in separate beakers. The two metallic strips which act as electrodes are connected by the conducting wire through a voltmeter. The two solutions are joined by a U – tube known as salt bridge which contain some electrolyte such as KCl, KNO3 or NH4Cl along with gelatin or agar – agar to convert it into semi – solid paste.

  1. Zinc undergoes oxidation to form zinc ions.
    Zn (s) > Zn2+ (aq) + 2e (oxidation)
  2. The electrons liberated during oxidation are passed through the connecting wire to copper strip
  3. Copper ions move towards copper strip, pick up electrons and get reduced to copper atoms which are deposited on the copper strip.

At the zinc strip oxidation of zinc atoms takes place and becomes a source of ele-ctrons acquiring negative charge. It acts as anode, since oxidation occurs at it. At the copper strip reduction of copper ions takes place and acquires positive charge. It acts as cathode, since reduction takes place.

The flow of electrons from zinc strip to copper strip produce electric current through the outer circuit from copper to zinc strip which is indicated by the deflection in voltmeter.

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry

Question 47.
What is electrical conductance of a solution? How is it measured experimentally ?
Answer:
The conduction through the electrolytes is due to the movement of ions produced by the electrolytes in their aqueous solution. It is generally called as electrolytic or ionic conductance.

Conductivity (K) or specific conductance is the reciprocal of resistivity. So if the resistance of the solution is known, its conductance can be easily calculated. The resistance of the electrolytic solution is measured with the help of Wheatstone bridge method. Its arrangement is shown in the figure.
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry 24
The setup consists of two resistances R3 and R4, a variable resistance R1 and the conductivity cell having solution of unknown resistance R2. An oscillator 0(a source of a.c power in the audio frequency range 550 to 5000 cycles per second) is connected to the bridge. P is a detector of null point (a head phone or an electronic device) and the bridge is balanced when no current device) and the bridge is balanced when no current passed through the detector. Under these conditions
Unknown resistance R2 = \(\frac{\mathrm{R}_1 \mathrm{R}_4}{\mathrm{R}_3}\)

Once the cell constant and the resistance of the solution in the cell are determined the conductivity of the solution is given by the equation.
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry 25
Molar Conductivity \(\Lambda_{\mathrm{m}}\) = \(\frac{\mathrm{K}}{\mathrm{C}}\)

Question 48.
Give the applications of Kohlrausch’s law of independent migration of ions.
Answer:
1) Calculation of limiting molar couductivities of weak electrolytes: Kohlrauschs law is useful in determining the limiting molar conductivities of weak electrolytes. For example, the value of \(\Lambda_{\mathrm{m}}^{\circ}\) for acetic acid (CH3COOH) can be calculated from the limiting molar conductivities of strong electrolytes like CH3COONa, HCl and NaCl.
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry 26

2) Calculation of degree of dissociation of weak electrolytes: Molar conductivity of weak electrolytes depends upon its degree of dissociation. With increase in dilution the degree of dissociation increases, so molar conductivity also increases. At infinite dilution the dissociation is complete and the molar conductivity of electrolyte becomes maximum attaining limiting molar conductivity (\(\Lambda_{\mathrm{m}}^{\circ}\)).
The degree of ionisation α is given by
α = \(\frac{\Lambda_{\mathrm{m}}^{\mathrm{c}}}{\Lambda_{\mathrm{m}}^{\circ}}\)
\(\Lambda_{\mathrm{m}}^{\mathrm{c}}\), is the molar conductivity of solution at any concentration C and \(\Lambda_{\mathrm{m}}^{\circ}\) is the limiting molar conductivity.

3) Calculation of dissociation constant of weak electrolyte: Dissociation constant of weak electrolyte can be calculated from its degree of dissociation at a given concentration.
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry 27

4) Determining the solubility of sparingly soluble salts : The aqueous solutions of sparingly soluble salts are infinitely dilute solutions due to their extremely low solubility. At the same time they are also saturated solutions so the solubility can be calculated by the measurement of conductivity (K) and molar conductivity (\(\Lambda_{\mathrm{m}}\)) of the aqueous solution.
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry 28

Question 49.
Give the different types of batteries and explain the construction and working of each type of battery.
Answer:
Batteries are two types:

1) primary batteries and
2) secondary batteries.

1) Primary batteries are those which become dead over a period and the chemical reaction stops. They cannot be recharged or used again.
Ex: Dry cell which is a compact form of Leclanche cell.
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry 29

The cell consists of zinc container and acts as the anode. The cathode is a carbon (graphite) rod surrounded by powdered manganese dioxide and carbon. The space between the electrodes is filled by a moist paste of ammonium chloride and zinc chloride. The electrode reactions are as follows.
Anode Zn (s) → Zn2+ + 2e
Cathode MnO2 + \(\mathrm{NH}_4^{+}\) + e → MnO(OH) + NH3

2) Secondary cell : After use it can be recharged and can be used again.
Example : Lead storage battery. It consists of lead anode and a grid of lead packed with lead dioxide (PbO2) as cathode. A 38%S solution of sulphuric acid is used as electrolyte. The cell reactions are
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry 30
The overall reaction is
Pb (s) + PbO2(s) + 2H2 SO4 (aq) → PbSO4 (s) + 2H2O (l)
These reactions occur during discharge of the battery. On charging the above reaction is reversed.

Questions Based On Numerical Data And Concept

Question 50.
The standard potentials of some electro-des are as follows. Arrange the metals in an increasing order of their reducing power.
1) K+ / K = -2.93 V
2) Ag+ / Ag = 0.80 V
3) Cu2+ / Cu = 0.34 V
4) Mg2+ / Mg = -2.37V
5) Cr3+ / Cr = -0.74 V
6) Fe2+ / Fe = -0.44 V
Answer:
Higher the value of oxidation potential or lower the reduction potential greater is the tendency of elements to oxidise and higher will be its reducing power. Thus the correct arrangement in decreasing order or their \(\mathrm{E}_{\text {red }}^\theta\)value is
Ag < Cu < Fe < Cr < Mg < K.

Question 51.
Calculate the emf of the cell at 25°C Cr | Cr3+ (0.1 M) || Fe2+ (0.01 M) || Fe2+(0.01M) / Fe given that \(\mathbf{E}_{\mathrm{Cr}^{3+} \mid \mathrm{Cr}}^0\) = -0.74V and \(\mathbf{E}_{\mathrm{Fe}^{2+} / \mathrm{Fe}}^0\) = -0.44 V
Answer:
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry 31
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry 32

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry

Question 52.
Calculate the potential of a Zn – Zn2+ electrode in which the molarity of Zn2+ is 0.001 M. Given that \(\mathbf{E}_{\mathbf{Z n}^{2+} \mid \mathbf{Z n}}^{\ominus}\) = -0.76 V R = 8.314 JK-1 mol-1 ; F = 96500 C mol-1
Answer:
Nernst equation
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry 33

Question 53.
Determine \(\Delta G^{\ominus}\) for the button cell used in the watches. The cell reaction is
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry 34
Answer:
In this cell zinc act as anode and silver electrode act as cathode
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry 35
= +0.80 – (-0.76) = + 1.56 V
\(\Delta_r G^\theta\) = \(-\mathrm{nFE}_{\text {cell }}^\theta\) = -2 × 96500 × 1.56
= -3.01 × 105 Cv (or) -301 kJ mol-1

Question 54.
Calculate the emf of the cell consisting the following half cells
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry 36
Answer:
The cell is
Al / Al3+ (0.001 M) || Ni2+ (0.50 M) / Ni
The cell reaction is
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry 37

Question 55.
Determine the values of Kc for the follow-ing reaction
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry 38
Answer:
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry 39

Question 56.
Calculate the potential of the half – cell containing 0.1 M K2Cr2O7, 0.2 M
\(\mathrm{Cr}^{3+}{ }_{(\mathrm{aq})}\) and 1 × 10-4 M \(\mathrm{H}^{+}(\mathrm{aq})\)
The half – reaction
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry 40
Answer:
The given equation is
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry 41

Question 57.
Calculate K for the reaction at 298 K
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry 42
Answer:
Calculation of \(\mathrm{E}_{\text {cell }}^\theta\)
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry 43
Here zinc electrode is anode and copper electrode is cathode.
∴ \(\mathrm{E}_{\text {cell }}^\theta\) = + 0.34 – (-0.76) = 1.1 V

Calculation of Kc
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry 44

Question 58.
Calculate the em! of the cell at 298 K
Sn(s) | Sn2+ (0.05 M) || H+(aq) (0.02 M) | H2 1 atm pt.
Given that \(\mathbf{E}_{\mathrm{Sn}^{2+} \mid \mathbf{S n}}^\theta\) = -0.144 V
Answer:
Cell reaction is
Sn(s) + SH+ (aq) → Sn2+ (aq) + H2 (g) n = 2
According to Nernst equation
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry 45

Question 59.
Calculate the concentration of silver ions in the cell constructed by using 0.1 M concentration of Cu2+ and Ag+ ions. Cu and Ag metals are used as electrodes. The cell potential is 0.422 V
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry 46
Answer:
The cell is Cu | Cu2+ Ag+ / Ag
The net cell reaction is
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry 47
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry 48

Question 60.
Calculate the em! of the cell with the cell reaction
Ni (s) + 2Ag+ (0.002 M) ) → Ni2+ (0.160 M) + 2Ag(s) ; \(\mathbf{E}_{\text {cell }}^{\ominus}\) = 1.05 V.
Answer:
The cell reaction is
Ni (s) + 2Ag+ (aq) → Ni2+ (aq) + 2Ag (s)
Here Ni / Ni2+ electrode is anode and Ag+/ Ag electrode is cathode
Applying Nernst equation to above system we have
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry 49

Question 61.
Cu2+ + 2e \(\rightleftharpoons\) Cu ; \(\mathbf{E}^{\ominus}\) = +0.34V
Ag+ + e \(\rightleftharpoons\) Ag ; \(\mathbf{E}^{\ominus}\) = + 0.80 V
For what concentration of Ag+ ions will the emf of the cell be zero at 25°C. The concentration of Cu2+ is 0.1 M (log 3.919 = 0.593).
Answer:
Since \(\mathrm{E}_{\mathrm{Ag}^{+} / \mathrm{Ag}}^{\ominus}\) is larger than \(\mathrm{E}_{\mathrm{Cu}^{2+} / \mathrm{Cu}}^{\ominus}\), reduction will occur at silver electrode and the cell is
Cu2+ / Cu || Ag+ / Ag
The cell reaction is
Cu(s) + 2Ag+(aq) → Cu2+ (aq) + 2 Ag (s)
According to Nernst equation
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry 50
[Ag+] = (3.89 × 10-16 × 0.1)<sup.1/2
= 6.222 × 10-8.

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry

Question 62.
The conductivity of 0.20 M solution of KCl at 298 K is 0.0248 S cm-1. Calculate molar conductance.
Answer:
Molar conductivity is given by = \(\frac{1000 \times K}{M}\)
= \(\frac{1000 \times 0.0248 \mathrm{~S} \mathrm{~cm}^{-1}}{0.20 \mathrm{M}}\)
= 12.4 cm2 mol-1

Question 63.
Calculate the degree of dissociation (α) of CH3COOH at 298 K
Given that \(\Lambda_{\mathrm{CH}_3 \mathrm{COOH}}^{\infty}\) = 11.75 cm2 mol-1
\(\Lambda_{\mathrm{CH}_3 \mathrm{COO}^{-}}^0\) = 40.95 cm2 mol-1
\(\Lambda_{\mathbf{H}^{+}}^0\) = 349.15 cm2 mol-1
Answer:
The degree of dinociation α is given us
α = \(\frac{\Lambda_{\mathrm{m}}^{\mathrm{c}}}{\Lambda_{\mathrm{m}}^0}\)
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry 51

Intext Questions – Answers

Question 1.
How would you determine the standard electrode potential of the system Mg2+ | Mg?
Answer:
Set up a cell consisting of Mg | MgSO4 (1M) as one electrode (by dipping a magnesium rod in 1M MgSO4 solution) and standard hydrogen electrode Pt,H2(1 atm) | H+ (1M) as the second electrode and measure the EMF of the cell. Also note the direction of deflection in the voltmeter. The direction of deflection shows that electrons flow from magnesium electrode to hydrogen electrode, i.e., oxidation takes place at magnesium electrode and reduction at hydrogen electrode. Hence the cell may be represented as follows.
Mg | Mg2+ (1M) || H+ (1M) | H2, (1 atm), Pt
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry 52

Question 2.
Can you store copper sulphate solutions in zinc pot ?
Answer:
As \(\mathrm{E}_{\mathrm{Zn}^{2+} \mid \mathrm{Zn}}\) (-076 V) is lower than
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry 53 (+0.34 V), therefore, Cu2+ ions can oxidise Zn to Zn2+ ions according to the reaction.
Cu2+ (aq) + Zn (s) → Zn2+ (aq) + Cu (s)
Hence, CuSO4 solution cannot be stored in zinc pot.

Question 3.
Consult the table of standard electrode potentials and suggest three substances that can oxidise ferrous ions under suitable conditions.
Answer:
Fe2+ → Fe3+ + \(\mathrm{e}^{-} \mathrm{E}_{\mathrm{oxid}}^{\ominus}\) = – 0.77 V
Only those substances can oxidise Fe2+ to Fe3+ which are stronger oxidising agents than 0.77V so that the EMF of the cell reaction is positive. This is so for elements lying below Fe3+ | Fe2+ in the electrochemical series e.g. F2, Cl2, Ag+ etc.

Question 4.
Calculate the potential of hydrogen ele-ctrode placed in a solution of pH 10.
Answer:
The reduction half reaction for hydrogen electrode is
2H+ (aq) + 2e → H2 (g)
Applying Nernst equation
E = \(\mathrm{E}^{\ominus}\) + \(\frac{0.059}{2}\)log [H+]2
= 0 + 0.059 log [H+]
pH = 10
∴ – log [H+] = -10
(or) log [H+] = – 10
∴ E = 0.059 (-10) = -0.59V

Question 5.
Calculate the emf of the cell in which the following reaction is taking place :
Ni (s) + 2Ag+ (0.002 M) → Ni2+ (0.160 M) + 2Ag(s)
Given that \(\mathbf{E}_{\text {(cell) }}^{\ominus}\) = 1.05 V
Answer:
The cell reaction is
Ni (s) + 2Ag+ (aq) → Ni2+ (aq) + 2Ag (s)
Here Ni / Ni2+ electrode is anode and Ag+ / Ag electrode is cathode.
Applying Nernst equation to above system we have
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry 54

Question 6.
The cell in which the following cell reaction occurs:
2Fe3+ (aq) + 2e (aq) → 2 Fe2+ (aq) + I2(s) has \(E_{\text {cell }}^{\ominus}\) = 0.236V at 298 K. Calculate the standard Gibbs energy and the equilibrium constant of the cell reaction.
Answer:
2Fe3+ (aq) + 2e (aq) → 2 Fe2+ or 2I → I2 + 2e
Hence, for the given cell reaction n = 2
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry 55

Question 7.
Why does the conductivity of a solution decrease with dilution?
Answer:
Conductivity of a solution is the conductance of ions present in a unit volume of the solution. On dilution the number of ions per unit volume decreases. Hence the conductivity decreases.

Question 8.
Suggest a way to determine the \(\Lambda_{\mathrm{m}}^{\circ}\) value of water.
Answer:
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry 56

Question 9.
The molar conductivity of 0.025 mol L-1 methanoic acid is 46.1 S cm2 mol-1. Calcu-late its degree of dissociation and dissoci-ation constant. Given λ0 (H+) = 349.6 S cm2 mol-1 and λ0 (HCOO) = 54.6 S cm2 mol-1.
Answer:
\(\Lambda_{\mathrm{HCOOH}}^0\) = \(\lambda_{\mathrm{H}^{+}}^0\) + \(\lambda_{\mathrm{HCOO}^{-}}^0\)
= 349.6 + 54.6 S cm2 mol-1
= 404.2 S cm2 mol-1
\(\Lambda^{\mathrm{c}}\) = 46.1 S cm2 mol-1 (Given)
∴ α = \(\frac{\Lambda^c}{\Lambda^0}\) = \(\frac{46.1}{404.2}\) = 0.114
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry 57

Question 10.
If a currect of 0.5 ampere flows through a metallic wire for 2 hours, then how many electrons would flow through the wire.
Answer:
Current strength = 0.5 A
Time = 2 hr = 2 × 60 × 60 = 7200 s
Quantity of electricity = 0.5 × 7200 = 3600 C
Electrons flowing for 96500 C of electricity
= 6.02 × 1023
Electrons flowing for 3600 C of electricity
= \(\frac{6.02 \times 10^{23} \times 3600}{96500}\) = 6.02 × 1023

Question 11.
Suggest a list of metals that are extracted electrolytically.
Answer:
Na, K, Ca, Mg and Al (i.e., cations of 1, 2 and 13 groups).

Question 12.
Consider the reaction
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry 58
What is the quantity of electricity in coulombs needed to reduce 1 mol of \(\mathrm{Cr}_2 \mathrm{O}_7^{2-}\)?
Answer:
From the given reaction 1 mol of \(\mathrm{Cr}_2 \mathrm{O}_7^{2-}\) ions require 6F = 6 × 96500 C = 579000 C of electricity for reduction of Cr3+.

Question 13.
Write the chemistry of recharging the lead storage battery, highlighting all the materials that are involved during recharging ?
Answer:
During recharging of lead storage battery, electrical energy is supplied externally. The following reactions will take place.
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry 59

Question 14.
Suggest two materials other than Hydrogen that can be used as fuels in fuel cells.
Answer:
Methane and Methanol

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry

Question 15.
Explain how rusting of Iron is envisaged as setting up of an electrochemical cell.
Answer:
Rusting of Iron occurs in the presence of water and air aiid it may be considered as electrochemical phenomenon.
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry 60
Oxidation : Fe (s) Fe2+ (aq) + 2e
Reduction: O2 (g) + 4H+ (aq) + 4e → 2H2O (1)
Atomospheric
oxidation : 2Fe2+ (aq) + 2H2O (1) + 1/2O2 (g) → Fe2O3 (s) + 4H+ (aq)
At a particular spot of Iron, oxidation takes place and that spot acts as anode.
Anode : 2Fe (s) → 2Fe+2 + 4e,
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry 61
The electrons released at anodic spot go to mother spot on the metal and reduce oxygen at that spot in the presence of H+
Cathode : O2 (g) + \(4 \mathrm{H}^{+} \text {(aq) }\) + 4e → 2H2O (l) \(\mathrm{E}_{\mathrm{H}^{+}\left|\mathrm{O}_2\right| \mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{O}}^{\ominus}\) = 1.23 V
Overall reaction :
2Fe(s) + O2 (g) + 4H+ → 2Fe+2 (aq) + 2H2O (l), \(\mathrm{E}_{\text {cell }}^{\ominus}\) = 1.67V
The Ferrous ions are further oxidised by atmospheric oxygen to Ferric ions which come out as rust in the form of hydrated Ferric oxide.

TS Inter 1st Year Maths 1A Functions Important Questions Long Answer Type

Students must practice these Maths 1A Important Questions TS Inter 1st Year Maths 1A Functions Important Questions Long Answer Type to help strengthen their preparations for exams.

TS Inter 1st Year Maths 1A Functions Important Questions Long Answer Type

Question 1.
If f : A → B, g : B → C are two bijective functions, then prove that gof : A → C is also a bijective function. [Mar. 18, 16 (AP), 09 ; May 13, 12, 10, 08, 06, 04 00, 96, 92]
Answer:
Since f: A →B is a bijective function
o f: A → B is both one-one and onto functions.
Since f: A → B is a one-one function
⇔ a1, a2 ∈ A, f(a1) = f(a2) ⇒ a1 = a2
Since f: A → B is a onto function ⇔ ∃ one element a ∈ A such that f(a) = b, ∀ b ∈ B.
Since g: B → C is a bijective function
⇔ g: B → C is both one-one and onto functions.
Since g: B → C is a one-one function
⇔ b1, b2 ∈ B, g (b1) = g (b2) ⇒ b1 = b2
Since g: B → C is an onto function ⇔ ∃ one element b e B such that g(b) = c, ∀ c ∈ C.
If f: A → B, g : B → C ⇒ gof: A → C.

To prove that gof: A → C is a one-one function:
If gof: A → C is a one-one function
⇔ a1, a2 ∈ A, (gof) (a1) = (gof) (a2) ⇒ a1 = a2
Now (gof) (a1) = (gof) (a2)
g [f(a1)] = g [ f(a2)] [∵ g is one-one]
f(a1) = f(a2) [∵ f is one-one]
a1 = a2
Hence, gof: A → C is a one-one function.

To prove that gof: A → C is an onto function:
Let c ∈ C
If gof: A → C is an onto function ⇔ ∃ one element a ∈ A, such that
(gof) (a) = c, ∀ c ∈ C.
Now (gof) (a) = g [f(a)] = g(b) = c
Thus for any element c ∈ C, there is an element a ∈ A such that (gof) (a) = c.
∴ gof: A → C is an onto function.
Since gof: A → C is both one-one function and onto function then
gof: A → C is a bijective function.

TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Functions Important Questions Long Answer Type

Question 2.
If f : A → B, g : B → C are two bijective functions, then prove that (gof)-1 = f-1og-1. [Mar. ’16 (TS), 14, 11, 10, 06, 04, 02, 00, 92; May 15 (AP) 14, 11, 09, 02, 98, 94 Mar. 19 (AP) ]
Answer:
Since f: A → B, g : B → C are bijections
⇒ gof: A → C is a bijection
⇒ (gof)-1: C → A is also a bijection
Since f: A → B is a bijective function
then f-1: B → A is also a bijective function
Since g: B → C is a bijective function
then g-1: C → B is also a bijective function
⇒ f-1og-1: C → A is also a bijection
Since the two functions (gof)-1, f-1og-1 are from C → A their domains are same.
Let c ∈ C
Since f : A → B is onto ⇔ ∃ one element
a ∈ A such that
f(a) = b, ∀ b ∈ B
f(a) = b ⇒ f-1 (b) = a
Since g : B → C is onto ⇔ ∃ one element be B such that g(b) = c, ∀ c ∈ C
g(b) = c ⇒ g-1(c) = b
Now (gof) (a) = g[f(a)] = g (b) = c ⇒ a = (gof)-1(c)
⇒ (gof)-1(c) = a ………………. (1)
Also (f-1og-1) (c) = f-1 [g-1(c)] = f-1(b) = a ……………… (2)
∴ From (1) and (2)
(gof)-1(c) = (f-1og-1) (c)
∴ (gof)-1 = f-1og-1.

Question 3.
Let f : A → B, is a function and IA, IB are identity functions on A and B respectively. Then prove that foIA = f = IBof. [Mar. 18 (TS); Mar. 13, 08, 05; May 92]
Answer:
If f: A → B is a function.
If IA and IB are identity functions on A and B respectively.
i.e., IA : A → B, IB : B → B

(i) IA: A → A, f: A → B ⇒ f o IA : A → B
Hence, functions f o IA and f are defined on same domain A.
Let a ∈ A
(f o IA) (a) = f[IA (a)] = f(a)
∴ f o IA = f

(ii) f: A → B, IB: B → B ⇒ IB o f: A → B
The functions (IB o f) and f are defined on the same domain A.
Let a ∈ A
Now (IB o f)(a) = IB[f(a)] = f(a)
∴ IB o f = f ………………. (2)
From (1) and (2) we get
f o IA = IB o f = f

Question 4.
If f: A → B is a bijection, then prove that fof-1 = IB and f-1 o f = IA. [Mar. 17, 15 (AP); Mar. 12, 07, 03, 02; May 07, 05, 01 Mar. 19 (TS)]
Answer:
TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Functions Important Questions Long Answer Type 1

(i) Since f: A → B is a bijection ⇒ f-1: B → A is also a bijection
IA; f: A → B, f-1: B → A ⇒ f-1 o f: A → A is also bijection
Clearly IA: A → A such that IA(a) = a, ∀ a ∈ A
Let a ∈ A
Since f-1: B → A is onto function ⇔ ∃ one element b ∈ B,
such that
f-1(b) = a, ∀ a ∈ A
f-1 (b) = a ⇒ f(a) = b
Now (f-1of) (a) = f-1[f(a)] = f-1(b) = a = IA(a)
∴ f-1of = IA

TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Functions Important Questions Long Answer Type

(ii) Since f: A → B is a bijection ⇒ f-1: B → A is also bijection
IB: f-1:B → A, f: A → B = fof-1:B → B is also a bijection
Clearly IB: B → B such that IB(b) = b, ∀ b ∈ B
Let b ∈ B
Since f-1: B → A is an onto function ⇔ ∃
one element b ∈ B such that f-1(b) = a, ∀ a ∈ A
f-1(b) = a ⇒ f(a) = b
Now (fof-1) (b) = f[f-1(b)] = f(a) = b = IB(b)
∴ fof-1 = IB

Question 5.
If f:A → B, g:B → A are two functions such that gof = IA and fog = IB, then prove that f is a bijection and g = f-1. [May 15 (TS); Mar. 08, 01; May 03]
Answer:
TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Functions Important Questions Long Answer Type 2
(i) To prove that f is one-one
Let a1, a2 ∈ A and since f : A → B, f(a1), f(a2) ∈ B
Now f(a1) = f(a2 ) ⇒ g[f(a1)] = g[f(a2)]
⇒ (gof) (a1) = (gof) (a2)
⇒ IA(a1) = IA(a2)
∴ a1 = a2
∴ f is one-one

(ii) To prove that f is onto
Let b be an element of B
IB (b) = (fog) (b)
⇒ b = f[g(b)] ⇒ f(g(b)) = b
i.e., there exists a pre-image g(b) ∈ A for b, under the mapping f.
∴ f is onto
Thus ‘f’ is one-one and onto hence, f-1: B → A exists and is also one-one onto.

(iii) To prove g = f-1
Now g:B → A and f-1:B → A
Let a ∈ A and b be the f – image of a where b ∈ B
∴ f(a) = b ⇒ a = f-1 (b)
Now g(b) = g[f(a)] (gof) (a) = IAA(a) = a
⇒ a = f-1 (b)
∴ g = f-1

Question 6.
If f:A → B, g: B → C and h: C → D are three functions then prove that ho(gof) = (hog) of. That is composition of functions is associative. [May ‘99, ‘95]
Answer:
f:A → B, g:B → C, h:C → D be three functions.
f:A → B, and g:B → C = gof: A → C
Now gof: A → C and h:C → D ⇒ ho(gof): A → D
g:B → C and h:C → D = (hog):B → D
Now f: A → B ⇒ hog: B→D
(hog)of: A → D
Thus ho(gof) and (hog)of both exist and have the same domain A and co-domain D.
Let a ∈ A,
Hence ho(gof) = (hog) of ∈ A
Now [ho(gof)] (a) = h [(gof) (a)] = h[g(f(a))]
= (hog) [f(a)] = [(hog) of] (a)
∴ [ho(gof)] (a) = [(hog) of] (a)

TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Functions Important Questions Long Answer Type

Question 7.
If f: A → B, g: B → C be surjections, then show that gof: A → C is a surjection. [May 98, 97, 96, 94, 93, 91]
Answer:
Let c ∈ C
Since f: A → B is a onto ⇔ ∃ one element
a ∈ A such that f(a) = b,∀ b ∈ B
Since g: B → C is a onto ⇔ ∃ one element
b ∈ B such that g(b) = c, ∀ c ∈ C.
If f: A → B, g:B → C = gof: A → C
To prove that gof : A → C is a onto
TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Functions Important Questions Long Answer Type 3
If gof : A → C is a onto ⇔ ∃ one element a ∈ A
such that
(gof) (a) = c, ∀ c ∈ C.
Now (gof) (a) = g[f(a)] = g(b) = c
Thus for any element c € C, there is an
element a ∈ A such that (gof) (a) = c.
∴ gof: A → C is an onto function.

Question 8.
If f = ((1, a), (2, c), (4, d), (3, b)} and g-1 = {(2, a), (4, b), (1, c), (3, d)}, then show that (gof)-1 = f-1og-1. {Mar. 15 (TS); May 07, 93}
Answer:
Given
f = {(1, a), (2, c), (4, d), (3, b))
f-1 = ((a, 1), (c, 2), (d, 4), (b, 3))
g = ((a, 2), (b, 4), (c, 1), (d, 3))
g-1 = {(2, a), (4, b), (1, c), (3, d)}

gof:
TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Functions Important Questions Long Answer Type 4

∴ gof = {(1, 2), (2, 1), (3, 4), (4, 3)}
(gof)-1 = {(2, 1), (1, 2), (4, 3), (3, 4)}
f-1og-1
TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Functions Important Questions Long Answer Type 5
f-1og-1 = {(1, 2), (2, 1), (3, 4), (4, 3)}
∴ (gof)-1 = f-1og-1

TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Functions Important Questions Long Answer Type

Question 9.
If the function f is defined by
TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Functions Important Questions Long Answer Type 6
then find the values of
(i) f(3)
(ii) f(0)
(iii) f(-1.5)
(iv) f(2) + f(- 2)
(v) f(- 5).
Answer:
Given
TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Functions Important Questions Long Answer Type 7
(i) For x > 1; f(x) = x + 2; f(3) = 3 + 2 = 5
(ii) For – 1 ≤ x ≤ 1; f(x) = 2, f(0) = 2
(iii) For – 3 < x < – 1; f(x) = x – 1 ∴ f(- 1.5) = – 1.5 – 1 = – 2.5 (iv) For x > 1, f(x) = x + 2
f(2) = 2 + 2 = 4
For – 3 < x < – 1, f(x) = x – 1
∴ f(- 2) = – 2 – 1 = – 3
f(2) + f(- 2) = 4 – 3 = 1
(v) f(- 5) is not defined.

Question 10.
If A = {- 2, – 1, 0, 1, 2) and f: A → B is a surjection defined by f(x) = x2 + x + 1 find B.
Answer:
Given, A = {- 2, – 1, 0, 1, 2)
f(x) = x2 + x + 1
Since f : A → B is a surjection then f(A) = B
f(-2) = (- 2)2 – 2 + 1 = 4 – 2 + 1 = 3
f(-1) = (- 1)2 – 1 + 1 = 1 – 1 + 1 = 1
f(0) = 02 + 0 + 1 = 1
f(1) = 12 + 1 + 1 = 1 + 1 + 1 = 3
f(2) = 22 + 2 + 1 = 4 + 2 + 1 = 7
∴ B = f(A) = {3. 1, 7}

Question 11.
If A = {1, 2, 3, 4} and f:A → R is a function defined by f(x) = \(\frac{x^2-x+1}{x+1}\), then find the range of f.
Answer:
Given A = {1, 2, 3, 4) and f(x) = \(\frac{x^2-x+1}{x+1}\)
Since f: A → R is a function, then
TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Functions Important Questions Long Answer Type 8

Question 12.
If f: Q → Q, is defined by f(x) = 5x + 4 for all x ∈ Q, find f-1. [Mar. 17 (TS)]
Answer:
Let y = f(x) = 5x + 4
y = f(x) ⇒ x = f-1(y) ……………… (1)
y = 5x + 4 ⇒ y – 4 = 5x
x = \(\frac{y-4}{5}\) ………………… (2)
From (1) and (2),
f-1(y) = \(\frac{y-4}{5}\) ⇒ f(x) = \(\frac{x-4}{5}\), ∀ x ∈ Q

TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Functions Important Questions Long Answer Type

Question 13.
If f(x) = \(\frac{x+1}{x-1}\) (x ≠ ± 1), then find (fofofof) (x).
Answer:
Given f(x) = \(\frac{x+1}{x-1}\) (x ≠ ± 1)
Now (fofofof) (x) = f[f[f{f(x)}]]
TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Functions Important Questions Long Answer Type 9

Question 14.
Find the domain of the real valued function f(x) = \(\sqrt{16-x^2}\).
Answer:
Given f(x) = \(\sqrt{16-x^2}\) ∈ R
⇒ 16 – x2 ≥ 0
⇒ x2 – 16 ≤ 0
⇒ (x + 4) (x – 4) ≤ 4
⇒ x ∈ [- 4, 4]
∴ Domain of ‘f’ is [- 4, 4]

Question 15.
Find the domain of the real valued function f(x) = \(\sqrt{9-x^2}\).
Answer:
Given f(x) = \(\sqrt{9-x^2}\) ∈ R
⇒ 9 – x2 ≥ 0
⇒ x2 – 9 ≤ 0
⇒ (x + 3) (x – 3) ≤ 0
⇒ x ∈ [- 3 ,3]
∴ Domain of f’ is [- 3, 3]

Question 16.
Find the domain of the real valued function f(x) = \(\frac{1}{6 x-x^2-5}\).
Answer:
Given f(x) = \(\frac{1}{6 x-x^2-5}\) ∈ R
⇒ 6x – x2 – 5 ≠ 0
⇒ x2 – 6x + 5 ≠ 0
⇒ x2 – 5x – x + 5 ≠ 0
⇒ x(x – 5) – 1 (x – 5) ≠ 0
⇒ x – 1 ≠ 0 or x – 5 ≠ 0
⇒ x ≠ 1 or x ≠ 5
∴ x ≠ 1, 5
∴ Domain of ‘f’ is R – {1, 5}

Question 17.
Find the domain of the real valued function f(x) = \(\frac{2 x^2-5 x+7}{(x-1)(x-2)(x-3)}\).
Answer:
Given f(x) = \(\frac{2 x^2-5 x+7}{(x-1)(x-2)(x-3)}\) ∈ R
⇒ (x – 1) (x – 2) (x – 3) ≠ 0
⇒ x – 1 ≠ 0, x – 2 ≠ 0, x – 3 ≠ 0
⇒ x ≠ 1, x ≠ 2, x ≠ 3
∴ x ≠ 1, 2, 3
∴ Domain of ‘f’ is R – {1, 2, 3}

TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Functions Important Questions Long Answer Type

Question 18.
Find the domain of the real valued function f(x) = \(\frac{\sqrt{2+x}+\sqrt{2-x}}{x}\).
Answer:
Given f(x) = \(\frac{\sqrt{2+x}+\sqrt{2-x}}{x}\) ∈ R
TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Functions Important Questions Long Answer Type 10
⇒ 2 + x ≥ 0, 2 – x ≥ 0 and x ≠ 0
x ≥ – 2, 2 ≥ x and x ≠ 0
x ≤ 2 and x ≠ 0
⇒ x ∈ [- 2, 0) ∪ (0, 2]
∴ Domain of ‘f’ is [- 2, 0) ∪ (0, 2]

Question 19.
If f = {(1, 2), (2, – 3), (3, – 1)}, then find
(i) 2f
(ii) 2 + f
(iii) f2
(iv) √f
Answer:
Given f = {(1, 2), (2, – 3), (3, – 2)}
Domain of ‘f’ is A = {1, 2, 3}
f(1) = 2f(2) = – 3, f(3) = – 1

(i) (2f) (x) = 2f(x)
(2f) (1) = 2f(1) = 2(2) = 4
(2f) (2) = 2f(2) = 2(- 3) = – 6
(2f) (3) = 2f(3) = 2(- 1) = – 2
∴ 2f = {(1, 4), (2, – 6),(3, – 2)}

(ii) (2 + f) (x) = 2 + f(x)
(2 + f) (1) = 2 + f(1) = 2 + 2 = 4
(2 + f) (2) = 2 + f(2) = 2 – 3 = – 1
(2 + f) (3) = 2 + f(3) = 2 – 1 = 1
∴ 2 + f = {(1, 4), (2, – 1), (3, 1)}

(iii) (f2) (x) = [f(x)]2
(f2) (1) = [f(1)]2 = 22 = 4
(f2) (2) = [f(2)]2 = (- 3)2 = 9
(f2) (3) = (f(3)]2 = (- 1)2 = 1
∴ f2 = {(1, 4), (2, 9), (3, 1)}

(iv) (√f)(x) = √f(x)
(√f) (1) = √f(1) = √2
(√f) (2) = √f(2) = √- 3 (not valid)
(√f) (3) = √f(3) = √- 1 (not valid)
∴ √f = {(1, √2)}

Some More Maths 1A Functions Important Questions

Question 1.
If f(x) = \(\frac{\cos ^2 x+\sin ^4 x}{\sin ^2 x+\cos ^4 x}\), ∀ x ∈ R then show that f(2012) = 1.
Answer:
TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Functions Important Questions Long Answer Type 11

Question 2.
If f: R → R is defined by f(x) = \(\frac{1-x^2}{1+x^2}\), then show that f(tan θ) = cos 2θ.
Answer:
Given f: R → R, f(x) = \(\frac{1-x^2}{1+x^2}\)
LHS = f(tan θ)
= \(\frac{1-\tan ^2 \theta}{1+\tan ^2 \theta}\) = cos 2θ + RHS
∴ f(tan θ) = cos 2θ

TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Functions Important Questions Long Answer Type

Question 3.
If f: R – {±1} → R is defined by f(x) = log \(\left|\frac{1+x}{1-x}\right|\), then show that f(\(\left(\frac{2 x}{1+x^2}\right)\)) = 2f(x)
Answer:
Given f: R – {±1} → R
TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Functions Important Questions Long Answer Type 12

Question 4.
If A = {x/ – 1 ≤ x ≤ 1}, f(x) = x2, g(x) = x3 which of the following are surjections?
(i) f : A → A
(ii) g: A → A
Answer:
(i) Given A = {x/ – 1 ≤ x ≤ 1}
∴ A = {- 1, 0, 1}
f(x) = x2
f(- 1) = (- 1)2 = 1
f(0) = (0)2 = 0
f(1) = (1)2 = 1
∴ f = (- 1, 1), (0 , 0), (1, 1))

f: A → A
TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Functions Important Questions Long Answer Type 13
Range of f(A) = {0, 1) ≠ A (co-domain)
∴ f : A → A is not a surjection.

(ii) Given A = {x/ – 1 ≤ x ≤ 1}
∴ A = {- 1, 0, 1}
g(x) = x3
g(- 1) = (- 1)3 = – 1
g(0) = (0)3 = 0
g(1) = (1)3 = 1
∴ g = {(- 1, -1), (0, 0), (1, 1)}
g: A → A
TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Functions Important Questions Long Answer Type 14
Range of g(A) = {- 1, 0, 1} = A (co-domain)
∴ g is a surjection.

TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Functions Important Questions Long Answer Type

Question 5.
If f(x) = cos (log x) then show that
\(f\left(\frac{1}{x}\right) \cdot f\left(\frac{1}{y}\right)-\frac{1}{2}\left[f\left(\frac{x}{y}\right)+f(x y)\right]\) = 0
Answer:
Given f(x) = cos (log x)
f\(\left(\frac{1}{x}\right)\) = cos\(\left(\log \frac{1}{x}\right)\) = cos (log x-1)
= cos (- log x) = cos (log x)
Similarly f\(\left(\frac{1}{y}\right)\) = cos (log y)
f\(\left(\frac{x}{y}\right)\) = cos \(\left(\log \left(\frac{x}{y}\right)\right)\)
= cos (log x – log y)
f(xy) = cos (log xy)
= cos (log x + log y)
L.H.S: f\(\left(\frac{1}{x}\right) \cdot f\left(\frac{1}{y}\right)-\frac{1}{2}\left(f\left(\frac{x}{y}\right)+f(x y)\right)\)
= cos (log x) . cos (log y) – \(\frac{1}{2}\) [cos (log x – log y) + cos (log x + log y)]
= cos (log x) . cos (log y)
TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Functions Important Questions Long Answer Type 15
= cos (log x) . cos (log y) – cos (log x) . cos (log y) = 0
= R.H.S

Question 6.
Find the inverse function of f(x) = log2x.
Answer:
Given f: (0, ∝) → R, f(x) = log2x
Let y = f(x) = log2x
y = f(x) = x = f-1(y) ……………. (1)
y = log2x ⇒ x = 2y (2)
From (1) & (2)
f-1(y) = 2y
⇒ f-1(x) = 2x

Question 7.
If f(x) = 1 + x + x2 +…….. for |x| < 1, then show that f-1(x) = \(\frac{\mathbf{x}-1}{\mathbf{x}}\).
Answer:
Given that f(x) = 1 + x + x2 + ………….
f(x) = \(\frac{1}{1-\mathrm{x}}\)
TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Functions Important Questions Long Answer Type 16

Question 8.
Find the domain of the real valued function f(x) = \(\frac{1}{\sqrt{\mathbf{x}^2-a^2}}\) (a >0). [Mar.15 (AP)]
Answer:
Given f(x) = \(\frac{1}{\sqrt{x^2-a^2}}\) ∈ R
⇒ x2 – a2
⇒ (x + a) (x – a) > 0
⇒ x < – a or x > a
⇒ x ∈ (- ∝, – a) ∪ (a, ∝)
∴ Domain of f’ is (- ∝, – a) ∪ (a, ∝)

TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Functions Important Questions Long Answer Type

Question 9.
Find the domain of the real valued function f(x) = \(\sqrt{(\mathbf{x}-\alpha)(\beta-\mathbf{x})}\) (0 < α < β).
Answer:
Given f(x) = \(\sqrt{(\mathbf{x}-\alpha)(\beta-\mathbf{x})}\) ∈ R
⇒ (x – α) (x – β) ≥ 0
⇒ (x – α) (x – β) ≤ 0
⇒ α ≤ x ≤ β
⇒ x ∈ [α, β]
∴ Domain of ‘f’ is [α, β]

Question 10.
Find the domain of the real valued function f(x) = \(\sqrt{2-x}+\sqrt{1+x}\).
Answer:
Given f(x) = \(\sqrt{2-x}+\sqrt{1+x}\) ∈ R
⇒ 2 – x ≥ 0 and 1 + x ≥ 0
⇒ 2 ≥ x and x ≥ – 1
⇒ x ≤ 2 and x ≥ – 1
⇒ x ∈ [- 1, 2]
∴ Domain of ‘f’ is [-1, 2]
TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Functions Important Questions Long Answer Type 17

Question 11.
Find the domain of the real valued function f(x) = \(\sqrt{|\mathbf{x}|-\mathbf{x}}\)
Answer:
Given f(x) = \(\sqrt{|\mathbf{x}|-\mathbf{x}}\) ∈ R
⇒ |x| – x ≥ 0
⇒ |x| ≥ x
⇒ x ∈ R
∴ Domain of ‘f’ is ‘R.

Question 12.
Find the domain and range of the real valued function f(x) = \(\frac{2+x}{2-x}\)
Answer:
Given f(x) = \(\frac{2+x}{2-x}\) ∈ R
⇒ 2 – x ≠ 0 ⇒ x ≠ 2
Domain of T is R – { 2 }.
Let y = f(x) = \(\frac{2+x}{2-x}\)
y = \(\frac{2+x}{2-x}\)
2yx – xy = 2 + x
2y – 2 = x + xy
2y – 2 = x(1 + y)
x ∈ R – {2}, y + 1 ≠ 0
y ≠ – 1
∴ Range of ‘f’ is R – {- 1}.

Question 13.
Find the domain and range of the real valued function f(x) = \(\sqrt{9-x^2}\) [Mar. 15 (TS)]
Answer:
Given f(x) = \(\sqrt{9-x^2}\) ∈ R
⇒ 9 – x2 ≥ 0
⇒ x2 – 9 ≤ 0
⇒ (x + 3) (x -3) ≤ 0
⇒ x ∈ [- 3, 3]
∴ Domain of ‘f’ is [- 3, 3]
Let y = f(x) = \(\sqrt{9-x^2}\)
y = \(\sqrt{9-x^2}\)
y2 = 9 – x2
x2 = 9 – y2
x = \(\sqrt{9-y^2}\) ∈ R
⇒ 9 – y2 ≥ 0
⇒ y2 – 9 ≤ 0
⇒ (y + 3) (y – 3) ≤ 0
⇒ y ∈ [- 3, 3]
But f(x) attains only non-negative values.
∴ Range of f = [0, 3].

TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Functions Important Questions Long Answer Type

Question 14.
Determine whether the function f(x) = x\(\left(\frac{e^x-1}{e^x+1}\right)\) is even or odd.
Answer:
TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Functions Important Questions Long Answer Type 18
Since f(- x) = f(x) then f is an even function.

Question 15.
Determine whether the function f(x) = log(x + \(\sqrt{x^2+1}\)) is even or odd.
Answer:
TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Functions Important Questions Long Answer Type 19
Since f(- x) = – f(x) then f(x) is an odd function.

Question 16.
Find the domain of the real valued function f(x) = log [x – (x)].
Answer:
Given f(x) = log [x – (x)] ∈ R
⇒ x – (x)> 0
⇒ x > (x)
Then x is a non – integer.
∴ Domain of ‘f’ is R – Z.

Question 17.
Find the domain of the real valued function f(x) = \(\frac{1}{\log (2-x)}\).
Answer:
Given f(x) = \(\frac{1}{\log (2-x)}\) ∈ R
⇒ log (2 – x) ≠ 0 and 2 – x > 0
⇒ log (2 – x) ≠ log 1 and 2 > x
⇒ 2 – x ≠ 1 and x < 2
⇒ x ≠ 1
∴ Domain of ‘f’ is (- ∝, 1) ∪ (1, 2)

Question 18.
Find the domain of the real valued function f(x) = \(\sqrt{\mathbf{x}-[\mathbf{x}]}\).
Answer:
Given f(x) = \(\sqrt{\mathbf{x}-[\mathbf{x}]}\) ∈ R
⇒ [x] – x ≥ 0 ⇒ x ≥ [x] ⇒ x ∈ R
∴ Domain of ’f is Z.

TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Functions Important Questions Long Answer Type

Question 19.
Find the domain of the real valued function f(x) = \(\sqrt{[\mathbf{x}]-\mathbf{x}}\).
Answer:
Given f(x) = \(\sqrt{[\mathbf{x}]-\mathbf{x}}\) ∈ R
⇒ [x] – x ≥ 0 ⇒ [x] ≥ x ⇒ x ∈ Z
∴ Domain of ‘f’ is Z.

Question 20.
If f and g are real valued functions defined by f(x) = 2x – 1 and g(x) = x2 then find
(i) (3f – 2g)(x)
(ii) (fg) (x)
(iii) \(\left(\frac{\sqrt{f}}{g}\right)\)(x)
(iv) (f + g + 2) (x)
Answer:
Given f(x) = 2x – 1 and g(x) = x2
Domain of f = domain of g R
Hence the domain of all the functions is R.
(i) (3f – 2g) (x) = 3f(x) – 2g(x)
= 3(2x – 1) – 2(x2)
= 6x – 3 – 2x2
= – 2x2 + 6x – 3

(ii) (fg)(x) f(x) . g(x)
= (2x – 1)(x2) = 2x3 – x2.

(iii) \(\left(\frac{\sqrt{f}}{g}\right)\) (x) = \(\frac{\sqrt{f(x)}}{g(x)}\) = \(\frac{\sqrt{2 x-1}}{x^2}\)

(iv) (f + g + 2) (x) = f(x) .g(x) + 2
= 2x – 1 + x2 + 2
= x2 + 2x + 1 = (x + 1)2

Question 21.
Find the domain of the real valued function f(x) = \(\sqrt{x^2-3 x+2}\).
Answer:
Given f(x)= \(\sqrt{x^2-3 x+2}\) ∈ R
⇒ x2 – 3x + 2 ≥ 0
⇒ x2 – 2x – x + 2 ≥ 0
⇒ x(x – 2) – 1(x – 2) ≥ 0
⇒ (x – 1) (x – 2) ≥ 0
⇒ x ≤ 1 or x ≥ 2
⇒ x ∈ (- ∝, 1] ∪ [2, ∝)
∴ Domain of ‘f’ is (- ∝, 1] ∪ [2, ∝)

Question 22.
f:R → R defined by f(x) = \(\frac{2 x+1}{3}\), then this function Is injection or not ? Justify. (Mar. 15 (TS)
Answer:
Given that f(x) = \(\frac{2 x+1}{3}\)
Let x1, x2 ∈ R.
Take f(x1) = f(x2) ⇒ \(\frac{2 x_1+1}{3}=\frac{2 x_2+1}{3}\)
⇒ 2x1 + 1 = 2x2 + 1 ⇒ 2x1 = 2x2 = x1 = x2
∴ f(x1) = f(x2) ⇒ x1 = x2
⇒ f is one – one.

TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Functions Important Questions Long Answer Type

Question 23.
If f = {(4, 5), (5, 6),(6, – 4)} and g = ((4, – 4), (6, 5), (8, 5)) then find f + g and fg. [Mar. ‘17(TS)]
Answer:
Given f = {(4, 5), (5, 6), (6, – 4)} and
g = {(4, – 4), (6, 5), (8, 5’)) then domain of f = {4, 5, 6) and Range of f = {4, 6, 8}
Domain of f + g = A ∩ B = {4, 6}
= (domain of f) ∩ (domain of g)
(i) f.g={(4, 5, – 4), (6, – 4 + 5)}
= {(4, 1), (6, 1)}

(ii) Domain of fg = (domain of f) ∩ (domain of g)
= A ∩ B = (4, 6)
= {(4, 5 × – 4).(6, – 4 × 5)}.
= {(4, – 20), (6, – 20)}

Question 24.
If f(x) = 2x – 1, g(x) = \(\frac{x+1}{2}\) for all x ∈ R, are two functions, then find,
(i) (gof) (x)
(ii) (fog) (x) [Mar. 19(TS)]
Answer:
Given f(x) = 2x – 1, g(x) = \(\frac{x+1}{2}\)

(i) (gof) (x) = g[ f(x) ]
= g[2x – 1] = \(\frac{2 x-1+1}{2}\) = \(\frac{2 x}{2}\) = x

(ii) (fog) (x) = f [g(x)]
= \(f\left(\frac{x+1}{2}\right)\) = 2\(\left(\frac{\mathrm{x}+1}{2}\right)\) – 1 = x + 1 – 1 = x

TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion

Telangana TSBIE TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material 7th Lesson Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion Textbook Questions and Answers.

TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material 7th Lesson Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion

Very Short Answer Type Questions

Question 1.
Is it necessary that a mass should be present at the centre of mass of any system? [AP May. ’16; May ’14]
Answer:
No. It is not necessary to present some mass at centre of mass of the system.
Ex: At the centre of ring (or) bangle, there is no mass present at centre of mass.

Question 2.
What is the difference in the positions of a girl carrying a bag in one of her hands and another girl carrying a bag in each of her two hands?
Answer:
i) a) When she carries a bag in one hand her centre of mass will shift to the side of the hand that carries the bag.
b) When a bag is in one hand some unbalanced force will act on her and it is difficult to carry.

ii) If she carries two bags in two hands then her centre of mass remains unchanged. Force on two hands are equal i.e. balanced so it is easy to carry the bags.

Question 3.
Two rigid bodies have same moment of inertia about their axes of symmetry. Of the two, which body will have greater kinetic energy?
Answer:
Relation between angular momentum and kinetic energy is, KE = \(\frac{L^2}{2I}\)

Because moment of inertia is same the body with large angular momentum will have larger kinetic energy.

Question 4.
Why are spokes provided in a bicycle wheel? [AP May ’14]
Answer:
The spokes of cycle wheel increase its moment of inertia. The greater the moment of inertia, the greater is the opposition to any change in uniform rotational motion. As a result the cycle runs smoother and speeder. If the cycle wheel had no spokes, the cycle would be driven in jerks and hence unsafe.

Question 5.
We cannot open or close the door by applying force at the hinges. Why? [AP May ’16]
Answer:
To open or close a door, we apply a force normal to the door. If the force is applied at the hinges the perpendicular distance of force is zero. Hence, there will be no turning effect however large force is applied.

TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion

Question 6.
Why do we prefer a spanner of longer arm as compared to the spanner of shorter arm?
Answer:
The turning effect of force, τ = \(\overline{\mathrm{r}}\times\overline{\mathrm{F}}\). When arm of the spanner is long, r is larger. Therefore smaller force (F) will produce the same turning effect. Hence, the spanner of longer arm is preferred as compared to the spanner of shorter arm.

Question 7.
By spinning eggs on a table top, how will you distinguish an hard boiled egg from egg? [AP Mar. ’13]
Answer:
To distinguish between a hard boiled egg and a raw egg, we spin each on a table top. The egg which spins at a slower rate shall be a raw egg. This is because in a raw egg, liquid matter inside tries to get away from the axis of rotation. Therefore, its moment of inertia ‘I’ increases. As τ = Iα = constant, therefore, α decreases i.e., raw egg will spin with smaller angular acceleration.

Question 8.
Why should a helicopter necessarily have two propellers?
Answer:
If the helicopter had only one propeller, then due to conservation of angular momen¬tum, the helicopter itself would turn in the opposite direction. Hence, the helicopter should necessarily have two propellers.

Question 9.
If the polar ice caps of the earth were to melt, what would the effect of the length of the day be?
Answer:
Earth rotates about its polar axis. When ice of polar caps of earth melts, mass concen¬trated near the axis of rotation spreads out. Therefore, moment of inertia ‘I’ increases.

As no external torque acts, L = Iω = I(\(\frac{2 \pi}{T}\)) = constant

with increase of I, T will increase i.e., length of the day will increase.

TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion

Question 10.
Why is it easier to balance a bicycle in motion?
Answer:
A bicycle in motion is in rotational equilibrium. From principles of Dynamics of rotational bodies is that the forces that are perpendicular to the axis of rotation will try to turn the axis of rotation but necessary forces will arise it cancel these forces due to inertia of rotation and fixed position of axis is maintained. So it is easy to balance a rotating body.

Short Answer Questions

Question 1.
Distinguish between centre of mass and centre of gravity. [AP Mar. 18, 17, 16, 15, 14, 13, May 17; June 15 : TS Mar. 16. 15, May 18, 17]
Answer:

Centre of massCentre of gravity
1) A point inside a body at which the whole mass is supposed to be concentrated.
A force applied at this point produces translatory motion.
1) A point inside a body through which the weight of the body acts.
2) It pertains (or) contain to mass of the body.2) It refers to weight acting on all particles of the body.
3) In case of small bodies centre of mass and centre of gravity coincide. (Uniform gravitational field)3) In case of a huge body centre of mass and centre of gravity may not coincide. (Non uniform gravitational field)
4) Algebraic sum of moments of masses about centre of mass is zero.4) Algebraic sum of moments of weights about centre of gravity is zero.
5) Centre of mass is used to study translatory motion of a body when it is in complicated motion.5) Centre of gravity is used to know the stability of the body where it is to be supported.

TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion

Question 2.
Show that a system of particles moving under the influence of an external force, moves as if the force is applied at its centre of mass. [AP May ’18]
Answer:
Consider a system of particles of masses m1, m2, ……….. mn moves with velocity
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion 1
But Force (F) = ma, so total force on the body is
F = MaC.M = m1a1 + m2a2 + m3a3 + ……….. + mn an
or Total Force F = MaC.M = F1 + F2 + F3 + ……… + Fn

Hence, total force on the body is the sum of forces on individual particles and it is equals to force on centre of mass of the body.

Question 3.
Explain about the centre of mass of earth-moon system and its rotation around the sun.
Answer:
The interaction of earth and moon does not effect the motion of centre of mass of earth and moon system around the sun. The gravitational force between earth and moon is internal force. Internal forces cannot change the position of centre of mass.

The external force acting on the centre of mass of earth and moon system is force between the sun and C.M. of earth, moon system. Motion of centre of mass depends on external force. Hence, earth moon system continues to move in an elliptical path around the sun. It is irrespective of rotation of moon around earth.

Question 4.
Define vector product. Explain the properties of a vector product with two examples. [AP Mar. ’17, ’15 ; TS Mar. ’17, ’16, ’15; APMay ’18. ’17; TS May ’18. ’16]
Answer:
Vector product (or) cross product :
If the product of two vectors (say \(\overline{\mathrm{A}}\) and \(\overline{\mathrm{B}}\)) gives a vector then that multiplication of vectors is called cross product or vector product of vectors.
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion 2

Properties of cross product:
1. Cross product is not commutative i.e.
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion 3
2. Cross product obeys distributive law i.e.,
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion 4
3. If any vector is represented by the combination of \(\overline{\mathrm{i}},\overline{\mathrm{j}}\) and \(\overline{\mathrm{k}}\) then cross product will obey right hand screw rule.
4. The product of two coplanar perpendicular unit vectors will generate a unit vector perpendicular to that plane
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion 5
5. Cross product of parallel vectors is zero
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion 6

Examples of cross product:
1) Torque (or) moment of force (\(\overline{\mathrm{\tau}}\)) :
It is defined as the product of force and perpendicular distance from the point of application.
∴ Torque τ = \(\overline{\mathrm{r}}\times\overline{\mathrm{F}}\)

2) Angular momentum and angular velocity :
For a rigid body in motion, Angular momentum (\(\overline{\mathrm{L}}\)) = radius (\(\overline{\mathrm{r}}\)) x momentum (\(\overline{\mathrm{P}}\))
∴ Angular momentum (\(\overline{\mathrm{L}}\)) = \(\overline{\mathrm{r}}\) × (m\(\overline{\mathrm{v}}\)) = m(\(\overline{\mathrm{r}}\times\overline{\mathrm{v}}\))

Question 5.
Define angular velocity. Derive v = r ω. [TS Mar. 19,’ 17, 16; AP Mar. 19, May. 16; May 14]
Answer:
Angular velocity (ω) :
Rate of change of angular displacement is called angular velocity.

Relation between linear velocity (v) and angular velocity (ω) :
Let a particle P is moving along circumference of a circle of radius r1 with uniform speed v. Let it is initially at the position A, during a small time ∆t it goes to a new position say C from B. Angle subtended during this small interval is say dθ.
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion 7

By definition angular velocity,
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion 8

Question 6.
State the principle of conservation of angular momentum. Give two examples.
Answer:
Law of conservation of angular momentum:
When no external torque is acting on a body then the angular momentum of that rota-ting body is constant.
i.e., I1ω1 = I2ω2 (when τ = 0)

Example -1:
A boy stands over the centre of a horizontal platform which is rotating freely with a speed ω1 (n1revolutions/sec.) about a vertical axis passing through the centre of the platform and straight up through the boy. He holds two bricks in each of his hands close to his body. The combined moment of inertia of the system is say I1. Let the boy stretches his arms to hold the masses far away from his body. In this position the moment of inertia increases to I2 and let ω2 is his angular speed.

Here ω2 < ω1 because moment of inertia increases.
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion 9

Example – 2 :
An athlete diving off a high spring board can bring his legs and hands close to the body and performs Somersault about a horizontal axis passing through his body in the air before reaching the water below it. During the fall his angular momentum remains constant.

TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion

Question 7.
Define angular acceleration and torque. Establish the relation between angular acceleration and torque. [TS Mar. ’18, ’17; TS May ’17, June ’15; AP Mar. ’19, June ’15]
Answer:
Angular acceleration (α) :
Rate of change of angular velocity is called angular acceleration.

Torque :
It is defined as the product of the force and the perpendicular distance of the point of application of the force from that point.

Relation between angular acceleration and Torque:
We know that, L = Iω

On differentiating the above expression with respect to time ‘t’
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion 10

But \(\frac{dL}{dt}\) is the rate of change of angular momentum called ‘Torque (τ)”.

and \(\frac{d \omega}{dt}\) is the rate of change of angular velocity called “angular acceleration (α)”

∴ The relation between Torque and angular acceleration is, τ = lα

Question 8.
Write the equations of motion for a particle rotating about a fixed axis.
Answer:
Equations of rotational kinematics :
If ‘θ’ is the angular displacement, Wj is the initial angular velocity, ωf is the final angular velocity after a time ‘t’ seconds and ‘α’ is the angular acceleration, then the equations of rotational kinematics can be written as,
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion 11

Question 9.
Derive expressions for the final velocity and total energy of a body rolling without slipping.
Answer:
A rolling body has both translational kinetic energy and rotational kinetic energy. So the total K.E energy of a rolling body is,
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion 12

Long Answer Questions

Question 1.
(a) State and prove parallel axis theorem.
(b) For a thin flat circular disk, the radius of gyration about a diameter as axis is k. If the disk is cut along a diameter AB as shown into two equal pieces, then find the radius of gyration of each piece about AB.
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion 13
Answer:
a) Parallel axis theorem :
The moment of inertia of a rigid body about an axis passing through a point is the sum of moment of inertia about parallel axis passing through centre of mass (IG) and mass of the body multiplied by Square of distance (MR²) between the axes i.e.,
I = IG + MR²

Proof :
Consider a rigid body of mass M with ‘G’ as its centre of mass. Iq the moment of inertia about an axis passing through centre of mass. I = The moment of inertia about an axis passing through the point ’O’ in that plane.

Let perpendicular distance between the axes is OG = R (say)

Consider point P in the given plane. Join OP and GP. Extend the line OG and drop a normal from ’P’ on to it as shown in figure.
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion 14

The moment of inertia about the axis passing through centre of mass G.
(IG) = ∑mGP² ……….. (1)

M.O.I. of the body about an axis passing through ‘O’ (I) = ∑mOP² ………… (2)
From triangle OPD
OP² = OD² + DP²
⇒ OD = OG + GD
∴ OD² = (OG + GD)² = OG² + GD² + 2OG. GD ………….. (3)
From Equations (2) and (3)
I = ∑mOP² = Em [ (OG² + GD² + 2OG. GD) + DP²]
∴ I = ∑m {GD² + DP² + OG² + 20G. GN}
But GD² + DP² = GP²
∴ I = ∑m {GP² + OG² + 20G. GD}
∴ I = ∑m GP² + ∑mOG² + 20G ∑mGD ………. (4)

But the terms ∑mGP² = IG
∑mOG² = MR² (∵ ∑m = M and OG = R)
The term 20G ∑mGD = 0. Because it represents sum of moment of masses about centre of mass. Hence its value is zero.
∴ I = IG + MR²

Hence parallel axis theorem is proved.

b) Moment of inertia of a disc of mass ‘M’ and radius ‘R’ about its diameter is,
I = \(\frac{MR^2}{4}\)

If ‘k’ is radius of gyration of disc then, I = Mk²
∴ Mk² = \(\frac{MR^2}{4}\) ⇒ k = R/2

After cutting along the diameter, mass M of each piece = \(\frac{M}{2}\)
Moment of inertia of each piece,
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion 15

Question 2.
(a) State and prove perpendicular axis theorem.
(b) If a thin circular ring and a thin flat circular disk of same mass have same moment of inertia about their respective diameters as axis. Then find the ratio of their radii.
Answer:
a) Perpendicular axis theorem :
The moment of inertia of a plane lamina about an axis perpendicular to its plane is equal to the sum of the moment of inertia about two perpendicular axis concurrent with perpendicular axis and lying in the plane of the body.
∴ Iz = Ix + Iy

Proof :
Consider a rectangular plane lamina. X and Y are two mutually perpendicular axis in the plane. Choose another perpendicular axis Z passing through the point ‘O’.
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion 16

Consider a particle P in XOY plane.
Its co-ordinates are (x, y).
Moment of inertia of particle about
X-axis is IX = ∑my².
M.O.I about Y-axis is IY = ∑mx²
M.O.I about Z axis is IZ = ∑ m . OP²
From triangle OAP,
OP² = OA² + AP² = y² + x²
∴ Iz = ∑ mOP² = ∑ m (y² + x²)
∴ Iz = X my² + ∑ mx²
But ∑ my² = Ix and ∑ mx² = Iy

∴ Moment of Inertia about a perpendicular axis passing through ‘O’ is IZ = IX + IY
Hence perpendicular axis theorem is proved.

b) Moment of inertia of a thin circular ring about its diameter is, I1 = m11

Moment of inertia of a flat circular disc about its diameter is, I2 = \(\frac{m_2R^{2}_{2}}{2}\)
Given that two objects having same moment of inertia i.e., I1 = I2

TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion 17

TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion

Question 3.
State and prove the principle of conservation of angular momentum. Explain the principle of conservation of angular momentum with examples. [AP Mar. ’16]
Answer:
Law of conservation of angular momentum: When no external torque is acting on a body then the angular momentum of that rotating body is constant.
i.e., I1ω1 = I2ω2 (when τ = 0)

Explanation:
Here I1 and I2 are moment of inertia of rotating bodies and ω1 and ω2 are their initial and final angular velocities. If
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion 18

Example -1 :
A boy stands over the centre of a horizontal platform which is rotating freely with a speed ω1 (n1 revolutions/sec.) about a vertical axis passing through the centre of the platform and straight up through the boy. He holds two bricks in each of his hands close to his body. The combined moment of inertia of the system is say I1. Let the boy stretches his arms to hold the masses far away from his body. In this position the moment of inertia increases to I2 and let ω2 is his angular speed.

Here ω2 < ω1 because moment of inertia increases.
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion 19

Example – 2 :
An athlete diving off a high spring board can bring his legs and hands close to the body and performs Somersault about a horizontal axis passing through his body in the air before reaching the water below it. During the fall his angular momentum remains constant.

Position of centre of mass of some symmetrical bodies :

Shape of the bodyPosition of centre of mass
1. Hollow sphere (or) solid sphereAt the centre of sphere
2. Circular ringAt the centre of the ring
3. Circular discAt the centre of disc
4. Triangular plateAt the centroid
5. Square plateAt the point of intersection of diagonals
6. Rectangular plateAt the point of intersection of diagonals
7. ConeAt \(\frac{3h}{4}\) th of its height from its apex on its own axis
8. CylinderAt the midpoint of its own axis.

Comparison of translatory and rotatory motions :
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion 20

Problems

Question 1.
Show that a • (b × c) is equal in magnitude to the volume of the parallelopiped formed on the three vectors a, b and c. (IMP)
Solution:
Let a parallelopiped be formed on three
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion 21
Now \(\hat{a}\) • (\(\hat{b}\times\hat{c}\) x c) = \(\hat{a}\) • be \(\hat{n}\) = (a) (be) cos 0° – abc

Which is equal in magnitude to the volume of parallelopiped.

TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion

Question 2.
A rope of negligible mass is wound round a hollow cylinder of mass 3 kg and radius 40 cm. What is the angular acceleration of the cylinder if the rope is pulled with a force of 30 N? What is the linear acceleration of the rope ? Assume that there is no slipping.
Soution:
Here M = 3 kg ; R = 40 cm = 0.4 m
Moment of inertia of the hollow cylinder about its axis, I = MR² = 3(0.4)² = 0.48 kg m²
Force applied, F = 30 N
∴ Torque, τ = F × R = 30 × 0.4 = 12 N – m

If α is angular acceleration produced, then from τ = Iα
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion 22
Linear acceleration, a = Ra = 0.4 × 25
= 10 ms-2.

Question 3.
A coin is kept a distance of 10 cm from the centre of a circular turn table. If the coefficient of static friction between the table and the coin is 0.8. Find the frequency or rotation of the disc at which the coin will just begin to slip.
Solution:
Distance of coin = r = 10 cm = 0.1 m.
Coefficient of friction µ = 0.8.
Frequency of rotation = number of rotations per second.
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion 23

Question 4.
Find the torque of a force \(\mathbf{7} \overrightarrow{\mathbf{i}}+\mathbf{3} \overrightarrow{\mathbf{j}}-5 \overrightarrow{\mathbf{k}}\) about the origin. The force acts on a particle whose position vector is \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{i}}-\overrightarrow{\mathbf{j}}+\overrightarrow{\mathbf{k}}\). [AP Mar. ’14, ’13; May ’13]
Answer:
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion 24
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion 25

Question 5.
Particles of masses 1g, 2g, 3g….., 100g are kept at the marks 1 cm, 2 cm, 3 cm…, 100 cm respectively on a meter scale. Find the moment of inertia of the system of particles about a perpendicular bisector of the meter scale.
Solution:
Given Masses of 1g, 2g, 3g 100 g are 1, 2, 3 ……….. 100 cm on a scale.
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion 26
i) Sum of masses 2m = \(\sum_{i=1}^n\)ni
Sum of n natural numbers S
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion 27
∴ Total mass M = 5051 gr = 5.051 kg → (1)

ii) Centre of mass of all these masses is given by
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion 28

iii) M.O.I. = I
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion 29
Sum of cubes of 1st n natural numbers is
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion 30

M.O.I. about C.M. = IG = I – MR²
= 2.550 – 5.05 × 0.67 × 0.67 = 2.550 – 2.267 = 0.283 kg.m2

iv) Perpendicular bisector is at 50 CM.
So shift M.O.I from centre of mass to
x1 = 50cm point from x = 67 CM
∴ Distance between the axis
R = 67 – 50 = 17cm = 0.17M
M.O.I. about this axis I = IG + MR²
= 0.283 + 5.05 × 0.17 × 0.17
= 0.283 + 0.146 = 0.429 kgm²
∴ M.O.I. about perpendicular bisector of scale = 0.429 kg – m²

TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion

Question 6.
Calculate the moment of inertia of a fly wheel, if its angular velocity is increased from 60 r.p.m. to 180 r.p.m. when 100 J of work is done on it. [TS May ’16]
Solution:
W = 100 J, ω1 = 60 RPM = 1 R.P.S = 2π Rad.
ω2 = 180 R.P.M. = 3 R.P.S = 6π Rad.
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion 31

Question 7.
Three particles each of mass 100 g are placed at the vertices of an equilateral triangle of side length 10 cm. Find the moment of inertia of the system about an axis passing through the centroid of the triangle and perpendicular to its plane.
Solution:
Mass of each particle m = 100 g; side of equilateral triangle = 10 cm.
In equilateral triangle height of angular bisector CD = \(\frac{\sqrt{3}}{2}\)l
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion 32

Centroid will divide the angular bisector in a ratio 2 : 1

So X distance of each mass from vertex to centroid is 2.\(\frac{\sqrt{3}}{2}\)l = \(\frac{\sqrt{3}}{2}\)l
Moment of Inertia of the system
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion 33

Question 8.
Four particles each of mass 100g are placed at the corners of a square of side 10 cm. Find the moment of inertia of the system about an axis passing through the centre of the square and perpendicular to its plane. Find also the radius of gyration of the system.
Solution:
Mass of each particle, m = 100 g = 0.1 kg.
Length of side’of square, a = 10 cm = 0.1 m
In square distance of corner from centre of square = \(\frac{1}{2}\) diagonal = \(\frac{\sqrt{2}a}{2}=\frac{a}{\sqrt{2}}\)
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion 34
∴ Total moment of Inertia
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion 35

Question 9.
Two uniform circular discs, each of mass 1 kg and radius 20 cm, are kept in contact about the tangent passing through the point of contact. Find the moment of inertia of the system about the tangent passing through the point of contact.
Solution:
Mass of disc = M = 1 kg.
Radius of disc = 20 cm = 0.2 m
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion 36
They are in contact as shown.
M.O.I of a circular disc about a tangent parallel to its plane = \(\frac{5}{4}\) MR²
Total M.O.I. of the system
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion 37

Question 10.
Four spheres each diameter 2a and mass ‘m’ are placed with their centres on the four corners of a square of the side b. Calculate the moment of inertia of the system about any side of the square.
Solution:
Diameter of sphere = 2a ⇒ radius = a.
Side of square = b.
For spheres 1 and 2 axis of rotation is same and passing through diameters. M.O.I. of solid sphere about any diameter = \(\frac{2}{5}\)MR² (put M = m and R = a)
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion 38

Transfer this M.O.I. on to the axis using
Parallel axis theorem.
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion 39
Total M.O.I. of the system
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion 40

Question 11.
To maintain a rotor at a uniform angular speed or 200 rad s-1, an engine needs to transmit a torque of 180 Nm. What is the power required by the engine? (Note : uniform angular velocity in the absence of friction implies zero torque. In practice, applied torque is needed to counter frictional torque). Assume that the engine is 100% efficient.
Solution:
Given uniform angular speed (ω) = 200 rad s-1
Torque, τ = 180 N – m ; But power p = τω
∴ P =180 × 200 = 36000 watt = 36 kW

TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion

Question 12.
A metre stick is balanced on a knife edge at its centre. When two coins, each of mass 5g are put one on top of the other at the 12.0 cm mark, the stick is found to be balanced at 45.0 cm. What is the mass of the metre stick?
Solution:
Let m be the mass of the stick concentrated at C, the 50 cm mark
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion 41
For equilibrium
about C’, i.e. at the 45 cm mark,
10g (45 – 12) = mg (50 – 45)
10g × 33 = mg × 5
m = \(\frac{10\times33}{5}\) = 66 grams

Question 13.
Determine the kinetic energy of a circular disc rotating with a speed of 60 rpm about an axis passing through a point on its circumference and perpendicular to its plane. The circular disc has a mass of 5 kg and radius 1 m.
Solution:
Mass of disc, M = 5 kg; Radius R = 1 m.
Angular velocity, co = 60 RPM = \(\frac{60\times 2\pi}{60}\) = 2πRad/sec

M.O.I. of disc about a point passing through circumference and perpendicular to the plane.
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion 42

Question 14.
Two particles, each of mass m and speed u, travel in opposite directions along para¬llel lines separated by a distance d. Show that the vector angular momentum of the two particle system is the same whatever be the point about which the angular momemtum is taken.
Solution:
Angular momentum, L = mvr
Choose any axis say ‘A’
Let at any given time distance between m1 & m2 = L = L1 + L2
About the axis ‘A’ both will rotate in same direction See fig.
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion 43
∴ Total angular momentum
L = L1 + L2 = muL1 + muL2 = mu (L1 + L2) = muL

about any new axis say B distance of m1 and m2
are say L’1 and L’2
Total angular momentum,
L = mu L’1 + mu L’2
or L = mu(L’1 + L’2) = muL (∵ L’1 + L’2 = L)
Hence, total angular momentum of the system is always constant.

Question 15.
The moment of inertia of a fly wheel making 300 revolutions per minute is 0.3 kgm². Find the torque required to bring it to rest in 20s.
Solution:
M.O.I, I = 0.3 kg. ; time, t = 20 sec.,
ω1 = 300 R.P.M. = \(\frac{300}{60}\) = 5. R.P.S.; ω2 = 0

Torque, τ = Iα = 0.3 × \(\frac{5\times 2\pi}{20}\) = 0.471 N – m.

Question 16.
When 100J of work is done on a fly wheel, its angular velocity is increased from 60 rpm to 180 rpm. What is the moment of inertia of the wheel?
Solution:
W=100J, ω1 = 60 RPM = 1 R.PS = 2π Rad.
ω2 =180 R.P.M. = 3 R.P.S = 6π Rad.
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion 44

TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion

Question 17.
Find the centre of mass of three particles at the vertices of an equilateral triangle. The masses of the particles are lOOg, 150g and 200g respectively. Each side of the equilateral triangle is 0.5 m long, lOOg mass is at origin and 150g mass is on the X-axis. [TS Mar. 18, June 15; AP Mar. ’18]
Solution:
Mass at A = 100g ; Coordinates = 0, 0
Mass at B = 150 g; Coordinates = (0.5, 0)
Mass at C = 200g; Coordinates (0.25,0.25 √3 )
Coordinates xcm
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion 45

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 2 Solutions

Telangana TSBIE TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material 2nd Lesson Solutions Textbook Questions and Answers.

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material 2nd Lesson Solutions

Very Short Answer Questions (2 Marks)

Question 1.
Define the term solution.
Answer:
Homogeneous mixture of two or more than two components is called solution.

Question 2.
Define molarity.
Answer:
Molarity (M) is defined as number of moles of solute dissolved in one litre of (or one cubic decimetre) solution.
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 2 Solutions 1

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 2 Solutions

Question 3.
Define molality.
Answer:
Molality (m) is defined as the number of moles of the solute present in one kilogram (kg) of the solvent.
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 2 Solutions 2

Question 4.
Give an example of a solid solution in which the solute is solid.
Answer:
In solid solution solute is solid. Here sol-vent is also solid. e.g., copper dissolved in gold (alloys).

Question 5.
Define mole fraction. (Mar. 2018 TS)
Answer:
Mole fraction is the ratio of number of moles of one component to the total number of moles of all the components in the solution.
Mole fraction of a component
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 2 Solutions 3

Question 6.
Define mass percentage solution.
Answer:
The mass percentage of a component of a solution is defined as
Mass % of a component
Mass % of the component
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 2 Solutions 4

Question 7.
What is ppm of a solution ?
Answer:
Parts per million
Number of parts of the
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 2 Solutions 5
This method is convenient when a solute is present in trace amounts.

Question 8.
What role do the molecular interactions play in a solution of alcohol and water ?
Answer:
The interaction between alcohol and alcohol is hydrogen bonding and H2O and H2O is also hydrogen bonding. After mixing the interaction between alcohol and H2O is also hydrogen bonding but less than the hydrogen bonding in alcohol and H2O separately. So after mixing the interaction between alcohol and water decreases and the vapour pressure of solution increases forming low boiling point azeotrope.

Question 9.
State Raoult’s law. (AP & TS 16) (IPE 14) (Mar. 2018 . AP & TS)
Answer:
For any solution the partial vapour pressure of each volatile component in the solution is directly proportional to its mole fraction.

Question 10.
State Henry’s law.
Answer:
The solubility of a gas in a liquid is directly proportional to the partial pressure of the gas present above the surface of liquid or solution.
(or)
Mole fraction of gas in the solution is proportional to the partial pressure of the gas over the solution.
(or)
The partial pressure of the gas in vapour phase (p) is proportional to the mole fraction of the gas (x) in the solution.
P = KH × x
KH is the Henry’s law constant.

Question 11.
What is Ebullioscopic constant?
Answer:
The elevation in the boiling point of one molal solution i.e., when one mole of solute is dissolved in 1 kg of solvent, is called boiling point elevation constant or molal elevation constant or ebullioscopic constant.
ΔTb = Kb m.
unit of Kb = K kg mol-1

Question 12.
What is Cryoscopic constant?
Answer:
The depression in freezing point of one molal solution i.e., when one mole of solute is dissolved in 1 kg of solvent, is called freezing point depression constant or molal depression constant or cryoscopic constant.
ΔTf = Kf m.
unit of Kf = K kg mol-1

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 2 Solutions

Question 13.
Define Osmotic pressure. (AP 16, 15) (Mar. 2018 – AP)
Answer:
When a solution is separated from a solvent by a semipermeable membrane or if a dilute solution is separated from concentrated solution by a semipermeable membrane, the pressure that just prevents passage of solvent into solution or solvent from dilute solution into concentrated solution is called osmotic pressure.
(or)
The extra pressure that is to be applied on the solution side when the solution and solvent are separated by a semipermeable membrane to stop osmosis.

Question 14.
What are isotonic solutions ? TS Mar. 19; (AP 17, 15; TS 16)
Answer:
Two solutions having same osmotic pressure at a given temperature are called isotonic solutions.

Question 15.
Amongst the following compounds, identify which are insoluble, partially soluble and highly soluble in water,
(i) Phenol
(ii) Toluene
(iii) Formic acid
(iv) Ethylene glycol
(v) Chloroform
(vi) Pentanol.
Answer:
Insoluble : Chloroform, toluene.
Partially soluble : Phenol, pentanol.
Highly soluble: Formic acid, ethylene glycol.

Question 16.
Calculate the mass percentage of aspirin (C9H8O4) in acetonitrile (CH3CN) when 6.5 gm of C9H8O4 is dissolved in 450g of CH3CN.
Answer:
Mass percentage of aspirin.
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 2 Solutions 6

Question 17.
Calculate the amount of benzoic acid (C6H5COOH) required for preparing 250ml of 0.15M solution in methanol.
Answer:
Molecular mass of benzoic acid (C6H5COOH) = 12 × 6 + 5 + 12 + 32 + 1 = 122 g mol-1
moles of benzoic = M × V
= 250 × 0.15 = 37.5
= 37.5 × 10-3 mol
Amount of benzoic acid = Moles × MW2
= 37.5 × 10-3 × 122
= 4.575 g.

Question 18.
The depression in freezing point of water observed for the same amount of acetic acid, dichloro – acetic acid and trichloro acetic acid increases in the order given above. Explain briefly.
Answer:
Increasing order of ΔTf (depression in freezing point) is Acetic acid < dichloroacetic acid < trichloroacetic acid.
Due to more electronegativity of Cl atom it exerts -1 (inductive effect) consequently dichloroacetic acid is the stronger acid than acetic acid. As the number of chlorine atoms increases the inductive effect also increases. Hence trichloro acetic acid is stronger acid than dichloroacetic acid.

Question 19.
What is van’t Hoffs factor ‘i’ and how is it related to ‘α’ in the case of a binary ele-ctrolyte (1 : 1) ?
Answer:
van’t Hoff introduced a factor ‘i’ known as the van’t Hoff factor to account the extent of dissociation or association. The factor ‘i’ is defined as
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 2 Solutions 7
If α represents the degree of association of the solute for an equilibrium.
nA \(\rightleftharpoons\) An
Total number of particles at equilibrium is 1 – α + \(\frac{\alpha}{2}\) = 1 – \(\frac{\alpha}{2}\)
Then i = \(\frac{\alpha / 2}{1 \cdot 1}\) = \(\frac{\alpha}{2}\)
For dissociation
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 2 Solutions 8
Total moles of particles aren(1 – α + α + α)
= n(1 + α)
i = \(\frac{n(1+\alpha)}{n}\) = 1 + α

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 2 Solutions

Question 20.
What is relative lowering of vapour pressure ? (AP Mar. 19)
Answer:
The ratio of the lowering of vapour pressure of a solution containing a non – volatile solute to the vapour pressure of pure solvent is called relative lowering of vapour pressure.
It can be shown as R.L.V.P. = \(\frac{p^{\circ}-p}{p^{\circ}}\)
Here p° is the vapour pressure of pure solvent, p is the vapour pressure of solution containing non – volatile solute.

Question 21.
Calculate the mole fraction of H2SO4 in a solution containing 98% H2SO4 by mass. (Mar. 2018 – TS)(IPE 14)
Answer:
Mass of water = 2 gm.
Moles of water = \(\frac{2}{18}\) = \(\frac{1}{9}\) (M.Wt. of H2O = 18)
Mass of H2SO4 = 98 gm.
Moles of H2SO4 = \(\frac{98}{98}\)
= 1 (Mol. Wt. of H2SO4 = 98)
Moles fraction of H2SO4 = \(\frac{1}{1+\frac{1}{9}}\) = \(\frac{9}{10}\) = 0.9

Question 22.
How many types of solutions are formed ? Give an example for each type of solution.
Answer:
Depending on the type of solvent three types of solutions will be formed.

Type of SolutionSoluteSolventCommon Examples
Gaseous SolutionsGas
Liquid
Solid
Gas
Gas
Gas
Mixture of oxygen and nitrogen gases
Chloroform mixed with nitrogen gas
Camphor in nitrogen gas.
Liquid SolutionsGas
Liquid
Solid
Liquid
Liquid
Liquid
Oxygen dissolved in water.
Ethanol dissolved in water.
Glucose dissolved in water.
Solid SolutionsGas
Liquid
Solid
Solid
Solid
Solid
Solutions of hydrogen in palladium.
Amalgam of mercury with sodium.
Copper dissolved in gold.

 

Question 23.
Define mass percentage, volume percentage and mass to volume percentage solutions.
Answer:
Mass percentage (w/w) : The mass percentage of a component of a solution is defined as
Mass % of a component
Mass of the component
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 2 Solutions 9
Volume percentage (V/V) : The volume percentage is defined as
Volume % of a component
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 2 Solutions 10
Mass to volume percentage (w/v): It is the mass of solute dissolved in 100 ml of the solution.

Question 24.
Concentrated nitric acid used in the laboratory work is 68% nitric acid by in aqueous solution. What should be the molarity of such a sample of the acid if the density of the solution is 1.504 g mL-1?
Answer:
68% by mass implies that 68 g of HNO3 is present in 100 g of solution.
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 2 Solutions 11

Question 25.
A solution of glucose in water is labelled as 10% w/w. What would be the molarity of the solution?
Answer:
Wt. of glucose = 1o g
Wt. of solution = 100 gm
Wt. of water = 100 – 10 = 90 gm.
Considering density of water as 1 gm mL-1
Volume of water = 90 mL
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 2 Solutions 12

Question 26.
A solution of sucrose In water is labelled as 20% w/w. What would be the mole fraction of each component in the solution?
Answer:
Wt. of sucrose = 20
Moles of sucrose = \(\frac{20}{342}\) = 0.0585
Wt. of solution = 100 g
Wt. of water = 100 – 20 = 80 g
Moles of water = \(\frac{80}{18}\) = 4.44
Mole fraction of sucrose = \(\frac{0.0585}{0.0585+4.44}\)
= 0.013
Mole fraction of water = \(\frac{4.44}{0.0585+4.44}\)
= 0.987

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 2 Solutions

Question 27.
How many ml of 0.1 MHCl is required to react completely with 1.0 g mixture of Na2CO3 and NaHCO3 containing equimolar amounts of both ?
Answer:
Let Na2CO3 be x g
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 2 Solutions 13
Since, given mixture contains equimolar amount.
∴ \(\frac{\mathrm{x}}{106}\) = \(\frac{1-x}{84}\) (or) x = 0.56
Total HCl required
= \(\left[\frac{2 x}{106}+\frac{1-x}{84}\right]\) = \(\frac{2 \times 0.56}{106}\) + \(\frac{1-0.56}{84}\)
= 0.01578 mol
If V is the volume of HCl required, then
V(L) × 0.1 = 0.01578
(or) V(L) = 0.1578L (or) 157.8 mL.

Question 28.
A solution is obtained by mixing 300g of 25% solution and 400g of 40% solution by mass. Calculate the mass percentage of the resulting solution.
Answer:
Mass of solute in 300 g of 25% solution.
= \(\frac{300 \times 25}{100}\) = 75 g
Mass of solute in 400 g of 40% solution
= \(\frac{400 \times 40}{100}\) = 160 g
Total mass of solute = 75 + 160 = 235 g
Total mass of solution = 700 g
% solute in final solution = \(\frac{235 \times 100}{700}\)
= 33.5%
% of water in final solution = 100 – 33.5
= 66.5%

Question 29.
An antifreeze solution is prepared from 222.6g of ethylene glycol (C6H6O2) and 200g of water (solvent). Calculate the molality of the solution.
Answer:
Mass of glycol (w1) = 222.6 g
Moles of glycol (n1)

= TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 2 Solutions 14
= \(\frac{222.6}{62}\)
= 3.59 mol
Mass of water (w2) = 200 g = \(\frac{200 \times 1 \mathrm{~kg}}{1000}\)
= 0.2 kg
Mass of solution (w1 + w2) = 200 + 222.6
= 422.6 g
Density of solution (d) = 1.072 g mL-1
Volume of solution (V)
= TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 2 Solutions 15
= \(\frac{422.6}{1.072}\)
= 394.22 mL (or) 0.3942 L
Molality (m) = \(\frac{\mathrm{n}_1}{\mathrm{w}_2 \mathrm{~kg}}\) = \(\frac{3.59 \mathrm{~mol}}{0.2 \mathrm{~kg}}\)
= 17.95 mol kg
Molarity (M) = \(\frac{n_1}{V \text { in lit }}\) = \(\frac{3.59}{0.3942}\) = 9.1 mol L-1

Question 30.
Why do gases always tend to be less soluble in liquids as the temperature is raised ?
Answer:
Dissolution of gases is exothermic process. It is because dissolution of a gas in a liquid decreases the entropy (ΔS < 0). Thus increase of temperature tends to push the equilibrium (Gas + solvent \(\rightleftharpoons\) solution, ΔH = -Ve) in the backward direction, thereby, suppressing the dissolution.

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 2 Solutions

Question 31.
What is meant by positive deviations from Raoult’s law and how is the sign of Δmix H related to positive deviation from Raoult’s law ?
Answer:
The solutions which do not obey Raoult’s law and are accompanied by change in enthalpy and change in volume during their formation are called non – ideal solutions.

In the solutions showing positive deviations the partial vapour pressure of each component (say A and B) of solution is greater them the vapour pressure as expected according to Raoult’s law. In this type of solutions the solvent – solvent and solute – solute interactions are stronger than solvent – solute interactions since in the solution, the interactions among molecules become weaker, their escaping tendency increases which results in the increase in their partial vapour pressures. In such solutions total vapour pressure of the solution is also greater than the vapour pressure required according to the Raoult’s law.
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 2 Solutions 16
For this type of non – ideal solutions exhibiting positive deviations.

  1. PA < \(P_A^0 x_A\); PB > \(\mathrm{P}_{\mathrm{B}}^0 \mathrm{x}_{\mathrm{B}}\)
  2. ΔmixH = +ve
  3. ΔmixV = +ve

Question 32.
What is meant by negative deviation from Raoult’s law and how is the sign of ΔmixH related to negative deviation from Raoult’s law?
Answer:
The solutions which do not obey Raoult’s law and are accompanied by change in enthalpy and change in volume during their formation are called non – Ideal solutions. In the solutions showing negative deviations the partial vapour pressure of each component of solution is less than the vapour pressure as expected according to Raoult’s law. In this type of solutions solvent – solvent and solute – solute interactiòns are weaker than that of solvent – solute interactions.

So the interactions among molecules in solution become stronger. Hence the escaping tendency of molecules decrease which results in the decrease in their partial vapour pressure. In such solutions total vapour pressure of the solution is also less than the vapour pressure expected according to Raoult’s law.
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 2 Solutions 17

For these solutions exhibiting negative deviations

  1. TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 2 Solutions 39
  2. Δmix H = -ve
  3. ΔmixV = -ve

Question 33.
The vapour pressure of water is 12.3 k Pa at 300K. Calculate the vapour pressure of 1 molar solution of a non – volatile solute in it.
Answer:
Vapour pressure of water \(\mathrm{P}_{\mathrm{H}_2}^0 \mathrm{O}\) 12.3 k Pa
In 1 molar solution
Moles of water nH2O = \(\frac{1000}{18}\) = 55.5 mol
Moles of solute nB = 1 mol
Mole fraction of H2O (XH2O) = \(\frac{\mathrm{n}_{\mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{O}}}{\mathrm{n}_{\mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{O}}+\mathrm{n}_{\mathrm{B}}}\)
= \(\frac{55.5}{55.5+1}\) = 0.982
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 2 Solutions 40

Question 34.
Calculate the mass of a non – volatile solute (molar mass 40g mol-1) which should be dissolved in 114g Octane to reduce its vapour pressure to 80%. (TS 16; IF’ 14)
Answer:
Vapour pressure of solution (p) = 80% of \(\mathrm{P}_{\mathrm{A}}^0\) = 0.8\(\mathrm{P}_{\mathrm{A}}^0\)
Let the mass of solute be w g
∴ Moles of solute nB = \(\frac{\mathrm{W}_{\mathrm{B}}}{\mathrm{M}_{\mathrm{B}}}\) = \(\frac{W}{40}\) mol
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 2 Solutions 41

Question 35.
A 5% solution (by mass) of cane sugar in water has freezing point of 271K. Calculate the freezing point of 5% glucose in water If freezing point of water is 273.15K.
Answer:
Molarity of sugar solution (m) = \(\frac{\mathrm{W}_{\mathrm{B}} \times 1000}{\mathrm{M}_{\mathrm{B}} \times \mathrm{W}_{\mathrm{A}}}\)
(or) m = \(\frac{5 \mathrm{~g} \times 1000 \mathrm{~g} \mathrm{~kg}^{-1}}{342 \mathrm{~g} \mathrm{~mol}^{-1} \times 95 \mathrm{~g}}\) = 0.154 mol kg-1
ΔTf = 273.15 – 271 = 2.15°
Now ΔTf = Kf × m or Kf = \(\frac{\Delta \mathrm{T}_{\mathrm{f}}}{\mathrm{m}}\) = \(\frac{2.15}{0.154}\) = 13.96
Molailty of glucose solution (m)
= \(\frac{5 \mathrm{~g} \times 1000 \mathrm{~g} \mathrm{~kg}^{-1}}{180 \mathrm{~g} \mathrm{~mol}^{-1} \times 95 \mathrm{~g}}\) = 0.292 mol kg-1
ΔTf = Kfm= 13.96 × 0.292 = 4.08°
Freezing point of glucose solution
= 273.15 – 4.08 = 269.07 K.

Question 36.
If the osmotic pressure of glucose solution is 1.52 bar at 300K. What would be its concentration if R = 0.083L bar mol-1 K-1?
Answer:
Temperature T = 300 K
Osmotic pressure = 1.52 bar
R = 0.083 L bar mol-1 K-1
π = CRT (or) C = \(\frac{\pi}{\mathrm{RT}}\)
= \(\frac{1.52 \mathrm{bar}}{0.083 \mathrm{~L} \mathrm{bar} \mathrm{mol}^{-1} \mathrm{~K}^{-1} \times 300}\)
∴ = 0.061 mol L-1

Question 37.
Vapour pressure of water at 293K is 17.535mm Hg. Calculate the vapour pressure of the solution at 293K when 25g of glucose is dissolved in 450 g of water. (AP Mar. 19)
Answer:
Vapour pressure of water \(\mathrm{p}_{\mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{O}}^{\mathrm{O}}\) = 17.535 mm.
Let vapour pressure of solution be ps
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 2 Solutions 18

Question 38.
How is molar mass related to the elevation in boiling point of a solution ?
Answer:
To calculate the molar mass of an unknown non – volatile compound a known mass (say WBg) of it is dissolved in a known mass (say WA g) of some suitable solvent and elevation in its boiling point (ΔTb) is determined. Let MB be the molar mass of the compound. Then
Molarity of solution m = \(\frac{W_B}{M_B} \times \frac{1000}{W_A}\)
We know, ΔTb = Kb × m = Kb × \(\frac{W_B}{W_A}\) × \(\frac{1000}{M_B}\)
MB = \(\frac{\mathrm{K}_{\mathrm{b}} \times \mathrm{W}_{\mathrm{b}} \times 1000}{\mathrm{~W}_{\mathrm{A}} \times \Delta \mathrm{T}_{\mathrm{b}}}\)
Knowing Kb, WB, WA and the molar mass of the compound can be calculated
from the above relation. This method is known as ebullioscopic method.

Question 39.
What is an Ideal solution?
Answer:
An ideal solution may be defined as the solution which obeys Raoults law over the entire range of concentration and temperature.

According to Raoult’s law, the vapour pressure of a volatile component (pA) of the solutions is equal to the product of its mole fraction (xA) in solution and vapour pressure in pure state \(\mathrm{P}_{\mathrm{A}}^0\).
PA = \(\mathrm{p}_{\mathrm{A}}^0 \mathrm{x}_{\mathrm{A}}\)

The formation of ideal solution neither involve any change in enthalpy nor in volume. An ideal solution,

  1. should obey Raoults law i.e., pA = \(p_A^0 x_A\) and pB = \(p_B^0 x_B\)
  2. ΔmixH = 0
  3. ΔmixV = 0

In ideal solutions the solvent – solvent and solute – solute interactions are almost the same type as solvent – solute interactions.

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 2 Solutions

Question 40.
What is relative lowering of vapour pressure ? How is it useful to determine the molar mass of a solute ?
Answer:
When a non – volatile solute such as urea, glucose etc., is dissolved in a volatile solvent such as water, the vapour pressure of solution will be less than that of pure solvent. This is known as lowering of vapour pressure.

The ratio of lowering of vapour pressure to that vapour pressure of pure solvent is known as relative lowering of vapour pressure.
\(\frac{\Delta \mathrm{p}}{\mathrm{p}_{\mathrm{A}}^0}\) = Relative lowering of vapour pressure
Δp = \(\mathrm{p}_{\mathrm{A}}^0-\mathrm{p}_{\mathrm{A}}\) = lowering of vapour pressure
\(\mathrm{p}_{\mathrm{A}}^0\) = vapour pressure of pure solvent

Determination of molar mass of a solute:
According to Raoult’s law the relative lowering of vapour pressure i equal to the mole fraction of the solute.
\(\frac{\Delta \mathrm{p}}{\mathrm{p}_{\mathrm{A}}^0}\) = xB
xB = mole fraction of solute,

If a known mass (WB) of the solute is dissolved in a known mass (WA) of solvent to prepare a dilute solution and the relative lowering of vapour pressure Is determined experimentally the molar mass of solvent (MA) is known, the molar mass of solute MB can be determined as follows.
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 2 Solutions 19
In this equation all the parameters except MB are known and hence MB can be calculated.

Question 41.
How is molar mass related to the depre-ssion in freezing point of a solution ?
Answer:
To determine the molar mass of an unknown non – volatile compound a known mass (say WBg) of it is dissolved in a known mass (say WAg) of some suitable solvent and depression in the freezing point (ΔTf) is determined. Let MB be the molar mass of the compound. Then
Molarity of the solution m = \(\frac{W_B}{M_B} \times \frac{1000}{W_A}\)
We know ΔTf = Kf × m = Kf × \(\frac{W_B}{W_A}\) × \(\frac{1000}{M_B}\)
MB = \(\frac{\mathrm{K}_{\mathrm{b}} \times \mathrm{W}_{\mathrm{B}} \times 1000}{\mathrm{~W}_{\mathrm{A}} \times \Delta \mathrm{T}_{\mathrm{f}}}\)
Knowing Kf, WB, WA and ΔTf, the molar mass of the compound can be calculated from the above relation. This method is called cryoscopic method.

Long Answer Questions (8 Marks)

Question 42.
An aqueous solution of 2% non – volatile solute exerts a pressure of 1.004 bar at the normal boiling point of the solvent. What is the molecular mass of the solute ?
Answer:
The vapour pressure of pure water
\(\mathbf{p}_{\mathrm{A}}^0\) = 1 atm = 1.013 bar
Vapour pressure of solution (p) = 1.004 bar
WB = 2g = WA + WB = 100g; WA = 98g
Now \(\frac{\mathbf{p}_{\mathrm{A}}^0-\mathrm{P}}{\mathbf{p}_{\mathrm{A}}^0}\) = \(\frac{\mathrm{n}_{\mathrm{B}}}{\mathrm{n}_{\mathrm{A}}}\) = \(\frac{W_B / M_B}{W_A / M_A}\)
or MB = \(\frac{W_B M_A}{W_A\left(\Delta P / P_A^0\right)}\) = \(\frac{2 \times 18 \times 1.013}{98 \times(1.013-1.004)}\)
= 41.35 g. mol-1

Question 43.
Heptane and Octane form an ideal solution. At 373K the vapour pressure of the two liquid components are 105.2 kPa and 46.8 kPa respectively. What will be the vapour pressure of a mixture of 26.0 g heptane and 35g of octane ?
Answer:
Moles of C7H16(nH) = \(\frac{W_{(H)}}{M_{(H)}}\) = \(\frac{25}{100}\) = 0.25 mol
Moles of C8H18 (nO) = \(\frac{W_{(0)}}{M_{(0)}}\) = \(\frac{35}{114}\) = 0.307 mol
Mole fraction of C7H16 = (XH) = \(\frac{0.25}{0.25+0.307}\)
= \(\frac{0.25}{0.557}\) = 0.466
Mole fraction of C8H18 (X0) = 1 – 0.449
= 0.534
Vapour pressure of heptane (pH)
\(\mathrm{p}_{\mathrm{H}}^{\mathrm{O}}\) × XH
= 105.2 \(\mathrm{Kp}_{\mathrm{a}}\) × 0.449
= 47.2348 \(\mathrm{Kp}_{\mathrm{a}}\) ≅ 49.02 \(\mathrm{kp}_{\mathrm{a}}\)
Vapour pressure of octane (PO)
= \(P_{\mathrm{H}}^O\) × XO
= 46.8 \(\mathrm{kp}_{\mathrm{a}}\) × 0.551 = 24.99 \(\mathrm{kp}_{\mathrm{a}}\)
Total vapour pressure PTotal = PH + PO
= 49.02 + 24.99 = 74.09 \(\mathrm{kp}_{\mathrm{a}}\)

Question 44.
A solution containing 30g of non – volatile solute exactly in 90g of water has a vapour pressure of 2.8 kPa at 298k. Further 18g of water is then added to the solution and the new vapour pressure becomes 2.9 \(\mathrm{kp}_{\mathrm{a}}\) at 298K. Calculate
(i) The molar mass of the solute and
(ii) Vapour pressure of water at 298k.
Answer:
Moles of solute (nB) = \(\frac{30}{M_B}\)
Moles of H2O(nH2O) = \(\frac{90}{18}\) = 5 mol
Mole fraction of H2O
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 2 Solutions 20
After adding 18g(= 1 mol) of water to solution new mole fraction of water(\(\mathrm{X}_{\mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{O}}^{\prime}\)) is
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 2 Solutions 21

Question 45.
Two elements A and B form compounds having formula AB2 and AB4. When dissolved in 20g of Benzene (C6H6), 1g of AB2 lowers the freezing point by 2.3K whereas 1.0g of AB4 lowers it by 1.3K. The molar depression constant for benzene is 5.1 K kg mol-1. Calculate atomic masses of A and B.
Answer:
We know
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 2 Solutions 22
Let the atomic weight of A = x
Let the atomic weight of B = y
x + 2y = 110.86
x + 4y = 196.15
Solving for x and y, we get
y = 42.64, x = 25.58
∴ Atomic weight of A = 25.8 u
Atomic weight of B = 42.64 u

Question 46.
Calculate the depression In the freezing point of water when 10g of CH3CH2CHClCOOH is added to 250g of water. Ka = 1.4 × 10-3, Kf = 1.86K kg mol-1.
Answer:
Calculation of molarity of the solution:
Mass of the solution = 250 + 10 = 260 g
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 2 Solutions 23

Calculation of van’t Hoffs factor (i) : Let degree of dissociation of acid be α since acid is monobasic acid, therefore α and Ka of acid are related as
α = \(\sqrt{K_{\mathrm{a}} / \mathrm{c}}\) = \(\sqrt{\frac{1.4 \times 10^{-3}}{0.284}}\) = 0.07
Van’t Hoff factor and degree of dissociation are related as
α = \(\frac{i-1}{m-1}\) = \(\frac{i-1}{2-1}\) or i = 1 + α = 1 + 0.07
(or) i = 0.7
Calculation of depression in freezing point ΔTf
ΔTf = i × Kf × m = \(\frac{1.07 \times 1.86 \times 10 \times 1000}{122.5 \times 250}\)
= 0.649 = 0.65°C

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 2 Solutions

Question 47.
19.5 g of CH2FCOOH is dissolved in 500g of water. The depression in freezing point of water observed is 1.0°C. Calculate the van’t Hoff factor and dissociation constant of fluoroacetic acid.
Answer:
Mass of solution = 500 + 19.5 = 519.5 g.
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 2 Solutions 24
Moles of CH2F COOH (nB) = \(\frac{W_B}{M_B}\) = \(\frac{19.5}{78}\)
= 0.25 mol
Molarity of solution (M) = \(\frac{n_B}{V_{(L)}}\) = \(\frac{0.25}{0.462}\)
= 0.541 moL-1
Mass of water (WA) = 500 g = 0.5 kg
Molarity of solution (m) = \(\frac{\mathrm{n}_{\mathrm{B}}}{\mathrm{W}_{\mathrm{A}} \mathrm{kg}}\) = \(\frac{0.25 \mathrm{~mol}}{0.25 \mathrm{~kg}}\)
= 0.5 mol kg-1
ΔTf = i × Kf × m or i = \(\frac{\Delta \mathrm{T}_{\mathrm{b}}}{\mathrm{K}_{\mathrm{b}} \times \mathrm{m}}\)
(or) i = \(\frac{1(\mathrm{~K})}{1.86 \mathrm{k} \mathrm{kg} \mathrm{mol}^{-1} \times 0.5 \mathrm{~mol} \mathrm{~kg}^{-1}}\)
= 1.0753
Each molecule of CH2F COOH dissociate into 2 particles as
CH2F COOH \(\rightleftharpoons\) CH2F COO + H+
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 2 Solutions 25

Question 48.
100g of liquid A(molar mass 140g mol-1) was dissolved in 1000g of liquid B(molar mass 180g mol-1). The vapour pressure of pure liquid B was found to be 500 torr. Calculate the vapour pressure of pure liquid A and its vapour pressure in the solution if the total vapour pressure of the solution is 475 torr.
Answer:
Let vapour pressure of pure A be \(\mathbf{p}_{\mathrm{A}}^0\)
\(p_{\mathrm{B}}^0\) = 500 torr ; nA = \(\frac{100}{140}\) = 0.714 mol
nB = \(\frac{1000}{180}\) = 5.55 mol
xA = \(\frac{0.714}{5.55+0.714}\) = 0.114
xB = 1 – 0.114 = 0.886
ptotal = \(p_A^0 x+p_B^0 x_B\)
(or) 475(torr) = \(p_A^0\) × 0.114 + 500 × 0.886
(or) \(\mathrm{p}_{\mathrm{A}}^0\) = 280.7 torr
PA = 280.70 × 0.114 = 32 Torr

Question 49.
Determine the amount of CaCl2 (i = 2.47) dissolved in 2.5 litre of water such that its osmotic pressure is 0.75 atm at 27°C.
Answer:
We know that π = CRT
or π = \(\frac{\mathrm{i} \times \mathrm{W}_{\mathrm{B}} \times \mathrm{R} \times \mathrm{T}}{\mathrm{M}_{\mathrm{B}} \times \mathrm{V}_{\mathrm{L}}}\)
or WB = \(\frac{\pi \times M_B \times V_L}{i \times R \times T}\)
van’t Hoff factor i = 2.47
Osmotic pressure p = 0.75 atm.
temperature T = 273 + 27 = 300 K.
Mol. wt of CaCl2, MB = 111
Volume of solution = 2.5 L
Constant R = 0.0821 L atm mol-1 K-1
WB = \(\frac{0.75 \times 111 \times 2.5}{2.7 \times 0.0821 \times 300}\) = 3.40 g
Moles of CaCl2 = \(\frac{3.4}{111}\) = 0.03 mol.

Question 50.
Determine the osmotic pressure of a solution prepared by dissolving 25 mg of K2SO4 in two litre of water at 25°C assuming that it is completely disassociated.
Answer:
K2SO4 is strong electrolyte, ionises completely
K2SO4 → 2K+ + \(\mathrm{SO}_4^{2-}\)
Therefore i = 3
Volume of the solution = 2L
Mass of K2SO4 (WB) = 25 mg = 0025 g
Molar mass of K2SO4 (MB) = 174 g mol-1
π = iCRT = i × \(\frac{3 \times 0.025 \times 0.0821 \times 298}{174 \times 2}\)
= 5.27 × 10-3 atm

Question 51.
Benzene and Toluene form ideal solution over the entire range of composition. The vapour pressure of pure benzene and toluene at 300K are 50.71 mm of Hg and 32.06 mm of Hg respectively. Calculate the mole fraction of benzene in vapour phase if 80g of benzene is mixed with 100g of toluene.
Answer:
If yb is the mole fraction of benzene in vapour form
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 2 Solutions 26
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 2 Solutions 27

Intext Questions – Answers

Question 1.
Calculate the mass percentage of benzene (C6H6) and carbon tetrachloride (CCl4) if 22g of benzene is dissolved in 122g of carbon tetrachloride.
Answer:
Weight of Benzene, w = 22 g
Weight of carbon tetrachloride, W = 122 g
Mass percentage of benzene = \(\frac{w \times 100}{W+w}\)
= \(\frac{22 \times 100}{22+122}\) = 15.27%
Mass percentage of carbon tetrachloride
= \(\frac{W \times 100}{W+w}\) = \(\frac{122 \times 100}{22+122}\) = 84.73%

Question 2.
Calculate the mole fraction of benzene in solution containing 30% by mass of it in carbon tetrachloride.
Answer:
Mass of benzene, w = 30 g
Mol. wt of benzene = 78 g mol-1
Moles of benzene = \(\frac{30}{78}\) = 0.385
Mass of CCl4 = 70 g
Mol. wt. of CCl4 = 154 g mol-1
Moles of CCl4 = \(\frac{70(\mathrm{~g})}{154(\mathrm{~g})}\) = 0.454
Mole fraction of benzene = \(\frac{0.385}{0.385+0.454}\)
Mole fraction of CCl4 = (1 – XBenzene)
= 1 – 0.459 = 0.541

Question 3.
Calculate the molarity of each of the following solutions
(a) 30 g of CO(NO3)2. 6H2O in 4.3L of solution
(b) 30 ml of 0.5 M H2SO4 diluted to 500 ml.
Answer:
a) Mass of CO (NO3)2. 6H20 = 30 g
Molar mass of CO(NO3)2. 6H2O
= 297 g mol-1.
Volume of solution = 4.3 L
Molarity M = \(\frac{30(\mathrm{~g})}{297 \mathrm{gmol}^{-1} \times 4.3 \mathrm{~L}}\)
= 0.023 mol L-1

b) Initial volume V1 = 30 ml
Molarity M1 = 0.5 mol L-1
Final volume V2 = 500 ml
Final molarity M2 =?
M1V1 = M2V2 (or) M2 = \(\frac{M_1 V_1}{V_2}\)
= \(\frac{0.5 \times 30}{500}\) = 0.03 mol L-1

Question 4.
Calculate the mass of urea (NH2CONH2) required in makIng 2.5 kg of 0.25 molal aqueous solution.
Answer:
The mass of urea required = WB
Molar mass of urea MB = 60
Mass of solution WA + WB = 2.5 kg = 2500 gm.
Mass of solvent WA = 2500 – WB
Molarity m = 0.25 mol kg-1
m = \(\frac{\mathrm{W}_{\mathrm{B}} \times 1000}{\mathrm{M}_{\mathrm{A}} \times \mathrm{W}_{\mathrm{B}}}\)
0.25 = \(\frac{\mathrm{W}_{\mathrm{B}} \times 1000}{6.0 \times\left(2500-\mathrm{W}_{\mathrm{B}}\right)}\)
Solving we get WB = 37.5 g.

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 2 Solutions

Question 5.
Calculate
(a) molality
(b) molarity
(c) mole fraction of KI if the density of 20% (mass/ mass) aqueous KI is 1.202 g mL-1
Answer:
Mass of KI(WB) = 20 g
Molar mass of KI (MB) = 166 g mol-1
Density of solution (d) = 1.202 g mL-1
Mass of solution (WA + WB) = 100 g
Volume of solution (V) = \(\frac{\text { Mass }}{\text { density }}\)
= \(\frac{100}{1.202 \mathrm{gmL}^{-1}}\) = 83.2 ml
Mass of solvent WA = 100 – 20 = 80 g.

a) Molality (m) = \(\frac{W_B \times 1000}{M_B \times W_A}\)
= \(\frac{20 \mathrm{~g} \times 1000 \mathrm{~g} \mathrm{~kg}^{-1}}{166 \mathrm{~g} \mathrm{~mol}^{-1} \times 80 \mathrm{~g}}\)
= 1.51 mol kg-1

b) Molarity (M) = \(\frac{\mathrm{W}_{\mathrm{B}} \times 1000}{\mathrm{M}_{\mathrm{B}} \times \mathrm{V}}\)
= \(\frac{20 \mathrm{~g} \times 1000 \mathrm{~mL}}{166 \mathrm{~g} \mathrm{~mol}^{-1} \times 83.2 \mathrm{ml}}\)
= 1.45 mol L-1

c)
Moles of KI(nB) = \(\frac{20 \mathrm{~g}}{166 \mathrm{~g} \mathrm{~mol}^{-1}}\) = 1.51 mol
Moles of water (nA) = \(\frac{1000 \mathrm{~g}}{18 \mathrm{~g} \mathrm{~mol}^{-1}}\) = 55.5
∴ Mole fraction of KI (xB) = \(\frac{1.51}{1.51+55.5}\)
= 0.026

Question 6.
H2S, a toxic gas with rotten egg like smell, is used for qualitative analysis. If the solubility of H2S in water at STP is 0.195 m, calculate Henry’s law constant.
Answer:
According to Henry’s law
KH . x = p or KH = \(\frac{p}{x}\)
P = 1 bar, solubility = 0.195 mol kg-1
Moles of H2S (nB) = 0.195
Moles of water (nA) = \(\frac{1000 \mathrm{~g}}{18 \mathrm{~g} \mathrm{~mol}^{-1}}\) = 55.5
∴ Mole fraction of H2S (x)
= \(\frac{0.195}{0.195+55.5}\) = 3.5 × 10-3
KH = \(\frac{1(\text { bar) }}{3.5 \times 10^{-3}}\) = 285.6 bar

Question 7.
Henry’s law constant of CO2 in water is 1.67 × 108 Pa at 298K. Calculate the quantity of CO2 in 500 mL of soda water when packed under 25 atm CO2 pressure at 298 K.
Answer:
Pressure of CO2 (p) = 2.5 atm
= 2.5 atm × 101325\(\frac{(\mathrm{Pa})}{\mathrm{atm}}\)
= 253312.5 Pa
According to Henrys law
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 2 Solutions 28
Moles of CO2 present in 500 ml
= \(\frac{0.0844}{2}\) mol = 0.0422 mol.
Amount of CO2 present in 500 ml
= 0.0422 mol × 440 g mol-1 = 1.86 g.

Question 8.
The vapour pressure of pure liquids A and B are 450 and 700 mm Hg respectively at 350K. Find out the composition of the liquid mixture if total vapour pressure is 600 mm Hg. Also find the composition of the vapour phase.
Answer:
Total vapour pressure PT = 600 mm Hg
Let Mole fraction of A is XA and that of B is XB
Vapour pressure of pure A(\(\mathrm{P}_{\mathrm{A}}^0\)) = 450 mm Hg
Vapour pressure of pure B(\(\mathrm{P}_{\mathrm{B}}^0\)) =700 mm Hg
Now PTotal = \(\mathrm{P}_{\mathrm{A}}^0 \mathrm{x}_{\mathrm{A}}\) + \(\mathrm{P}_{\mathrm{B}}^0 \mathrm{x}_{\mathrm{B}}\)
∴ 600 = 450 xA + 700 xB
= 450xA + 700(1 – xA)
= 700 – 250 xA or xA = 0.4
xB = 1 – xA = 1 – 0.4 = 0.6
Mole fraction of A in vapour phase
YA = \(\frac{x_A P_A^0}{P_{\text {Total }}^0}\) = \(\frac{0.4 \times 450}{600}\) = 0.3
Mole fraction of B in vapour phase
YB = \(\frac{\mathrm{x}_{\mathrm{B}} \mathrm{P}_{\mathrm{B}}^0}{\mathrm{P}_{\text {Total }}}\) = \(\frac{0.6 \times 700}{600}\) = 0.7

Question 9.
Vapour pressure of pure water at 298K is 23.8 mm Hg. 50 of urea (NH2 CO NH2) is dissolved in 850 g of water. Calculate the vapour pressure of water for this solution and its relative lowering.
Answer:
Mass of water = 850 g
Moles of water = \(\frac{850}{18}\) = 47.22 mol
Mass of urea = 50 g
Mol mass of urea = 60
Moles of urea = \(\frac{50}{60}\) = 0.83
Since the solution is not dilute the formula to be used is
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 2 Solutions 29

Question 10.
Boiling point of water at 750 min Hg is 99.63°C. How much sucrose is to be added to 500g of water such that it boils at 100°C.
Answer:
Let mass of sucrose required = WB g
Mass of solvent WA = 500 g
Molar mass of sucrose (C12H22O11) = 342
Elevation in boiling point ΔTb = 100 – 99.63
= 0.37°C
ΔTb = \(\frac{\mathrm{K}_{\mathrm{b}} \times \mathrm{W}_{\mathrm{B}} \times 1000}{\mathrm{~W}_{\mathrm{A}} \times \mathrm{M}_{\mathrm{B}}}\)
(or) WB = \(\frac{\Delta \mathrm{T}_{\mathrm{b}} \times \mathrm{W}_{\mathrm{A}} \times \mathrm{M}_{\mathrm{B}}}{\mathrm{K}_{\mathrm{b}} \times 1000}\)
= \(\frac{0.37 \times 500 \times 342}{0.52 \times 1000}\) = 121.

Question 11.
Calculate the mass of ascorbic acid (vitamin C, C6H8O6) to be dissolved in 75g of
acetic acid to lower its melting point by 1.5°C. Kf = 3.9 K kg mol-1.
Answer:
Let the mass of ascorbic acid required = WBg
Molar mass of ascorbic acid (C6H8O6) MB = 176 g mol-1
Mass of solvent (WA) = 75 g
Depression in melting point ΔTf = 1.5°C
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 2 Solutions 30

Question 12.
Calculate the osmotic pressure In pascals exerted by a solution prepared by dissolving 1.0 g of polymer of molar mass 185,000 ion 450 ml of water at 37°C.
Answer:
Mass of polymer (WB) = 1.0 g
Molar mass of polymer MB = 1,85,000 g mol-1
T = 37 + 273.15 = 310.15K
π = \(\frac{W_B R_T}{M_B V_{(L)}}\)
= \(\frac{1 \times 0.082 \times 310.15}{185000 \times 450 \times 10^{-3}}\)
= 3.05 × 10-4 atm
= 3.05 × 10-4 × 1.01 × 105Pa = 30.9 Pa

Problems

Question 1.
Calculate the mole fraction of ethylene glycol (C2H6O2) in a solution containing 20% of C2H6O2 by mass. (TS 15)
Answer:
Assume that we have 100 g of solution (one can start with any amount of solution because the results obtained will be the same). Solution will contain 20 g of ethylene glycol and 80 g of water.
Molar mass of C2H6O2 = 12 × 2 + 1 × 6 + 16 × 2 = 62 g mol-1.
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 2 Solutions 31

Question 2.
Calculate the molarity of a solution containing 5 g of NaOH in 450 mL solution. (TS Mar. 19; AP & TS 15)
Answer:
Moles of NaOH = \(\frac{5 \mathrm{~g}}{40 \mathrm{~g} \mathrm{~mol}^{-1}}\) = 0.125 mol
Volume of the solution in litres = 450 mL /1000 mL L-1
Using equation (2.8)
Molarity = \(\frac{0.125 \mathrm{~mol} \times 1000 \mathrm{~mL} \mathrm{~L}^{-1}}{450 \mathrm{~mL}}\)
= 0.278 M = 0.278 mol L-1
= 0.278 mol dm-3

Question 3.
Calculate molality of 2.5 g of ethanoic acid (CH3COOH) in 75 g of benzene. (TS 15)
Answer:
Molar mass of C2H4O2 = 12 × 2 + 1 × 4 + 16 × 2 = 60 g mol-1.
Moles mass of C2H4O2 = \(\frac{2.5 \mathrm{~g}}{60 \mathrm{~g} \mathrm{~mol}^{-1}}\)
= 0.0417 mol
Mass of benzene in kg = 75 g / 1000 g kg-1
= 75 × 10-3 kg
Molality of C2H4O2 = \(\frac{\text { moles of } \mathrm{C}_2 \mathrm{H}_4 \mathrm{O}_2}{\text { kg of benzene }}\)
= \(\frac{0.0417 \mathrm{~mol} \times 1000 \mathrm{~g} \mathrm{~kg}^{-1}}{75 \mathrm{~g}}\)
= 0.556 mol kg-1

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 2 Solutions

Question 4.
If N2 gas is bubbled through water at 293K, how many mililmoles of N2 gas would dissolve in 1 litre of water? Assume that N2 exerts a partial pressure of 0.987 bar. Given that Henry’s law constant for N2 at 293 K is 76.48 kbar.
Answer:
The solubility of gas is related to the mole fraction in aqueous solution. The mole fraction of the gas in the solution is calculated by applying Henry’s law. Thus:
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 2 Solutions 32
As 1 litre of water coñtains 55.5 mol of it, therefore If n represents number of moles of N2 in solution.
x(nitrogen) = \(\frac{n \mathrm{~mol}}{\mathrm{n} \mathrm{mol}+55.5 \mathrm{~mol}}\)
= \(\frac{\mathrm{n}}{55.5}\) = 1.29 × 10-5
(n in denominator is neglected as it is <<55.5)
Thus n = 1.29 × 10-5 × 55.5 mol
= 7.16 × 10-4 mol-1
= \(\frac{7.16 \times 10^{-4} \mathrm{~mol} \times 1000 \mathrm{~m} \mathrm{~mol}}{1 \mathrm{~mol}}\)
= 0.716 m mol

Question 5.
Vapour pressure of chloroform (CHCl3) and dichloromethane (CH2Cl2) at 298 K are 200mm Hg and 415 mm Hg respectively.
(i) Calculate the vapour pressure of the solution prepared by mixing 25.5 g of CHCl3 and 40 g of CH2Cl2 at 298 K and,
(ii) mole fractions of each component in vapour phase.
Answer:
i) Molar mass of CH2Cl2 = 12 × 1 + 1 × 2 + 35.5 × 2 = 85 g mol-1
Molar mass of CHCl3 = 12 × 1 + 1 × 1 + 35.5 × 3 = 119.5 g mol-1
Moles of CH2Cl2 = \(\frac{40 \mathrm{~g}}{85 \mathrm{~g} \mathrm{~mol}^{-1}}\) = 0.47 mol
Moles of CHCl3 = \(\frac{25.5 \mathrm{~g}}{119.5 \mathrm{~g} \mathrm{~mol}^{-1}}\)
= 0.213 mol
Total number of moles = 0.47 + 0.213
= 0.683 mol
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 2 Solutions 33
Using equation (2.16),
Ptotal = \(\mathrm{p}_1^0\) + (\(\mathrm{p}_2^0\) + \(\mathrm{p}_1^0\))x2
= 200 + (415 – 200) × 0.688
= 200 + 147.9 = 347.9 mm Hg

(ii) Using the relation (2.19) y1 = P1 / ptotal, we can calculate the mole fraction of the components in gas phase (y1).
\(\mathrm{p}_{\mathrm{CH}_2} \mathrm{Cl}_2\) = 0.688 × 415 mm Hg = 285.5 mm Hg
\(\mathbf{p}_{\mathrm{CHCl}_3}\) = 0.312 × 200 mm Hg = 62.4 mm Hg
\(\mathbf{y}_{\mathrm{CH}_2 \mathrm{Cl}_2}\) = 285.5 mm Hg / 347.9 mm Hg = 0.82
\(\mathbf{y}_{\mathrm{CHCl} 3}\) = 62.4 mm Hg/ 347.9 mm Hg = 0.18

Note : Since, CH2Cl2 is a more volatile component than CHCl3, [\(\mathrm{p}_{\mathrm{CH}_2}^0 \mathrm{Cl}_2\) = 415 mm Hg and \(\mathbf{p}_{\mathrm{CHC} l_3}^0\) = 200 mm Hg] and the vapour phase is also richer in CH2Cl2 [\(\mathbf{y}_{\mathrm{CH}_2} \mathrm{Cl}_2\) = 0.82 and \(\mathbf{y}_{\mathrm{CHCl}_3} \)= 0.18], it may thus be concluded that at equilibrium, vapour phase will be always rich in the component which is more volatile.

Question 6.
The vapour pressure of pure benzene at a certain temperature is 0.850 bar. A non – volatile, non – electrolyte solid weighing 0.5 g when added to 39.0 g of benzene (molar mass 78 g mol-1). Vapour pressure of the solution, then, is 0.845 bar. What is the molar mass of the solid substance ? (Mar. 2018, 16 AP)
Answer:
The various quantities known to us are as follows :
\(\mathrm{p}_1^0\) = 0.850 bar ; p = 0.845 bar
M1 = 78 g mol-1; w2 = 0.5 g; w1 = 39 g
Substituting these values in equation (2.28), we get
\(\frac{0.850 \mathrm{bar}-0.845 \mathrm{bar}}{0.850 \mathrm{bar}}\) = \(\frac{0.5 \mathrm{~g} \times 78 \mathrm{~g} \mathrm{~mol}^{-1}}{\mathrm{M}_2 \times 39 \mathrm{~g}}\)
Therefore, M2 = 170 g mol-1

Question 7.
18 g of glucose, C6H12O6, is dissolved in 1 kg of water In a saucepan. At what temperature will water boll at 1.013 bar? Kb for water is 0.52 K kg mol-1.
Answer:
Moles of glucose = 18 g / 180 g mol-1
= 0.1 mol
Number of kilograms of solvent = 1 kg
Thus molality of glucose solution
= 0.1 mol kg-1
For water, change in boiling point
ΔTb = Kb × m = 0.52 K kg mol-1 × 0.1 mol kg-1 = 0.052 K

Since water boils at 373.15 Kat 1.013 bar pressure, therefore, the boiling point of solution will be 373.15 + 0.052 = 373.202 K.

Question 8.
The boiling point of benzene is 353.23 K. When 1.80 g of a non – volatile solute was dissolved in 90 g of benzene, the boiling point is raised to 354.11 K. Calculate the molar mass of the solute. Kb for benzene is 2.53 K kg mol-1.
Answer:
The elevation (ΔTb) in the boiling point = 354.11 K – 352.23 K = 0.88 K
Substituting these values in expression (2.33) we get
M2 = \(\frac{2.53 \mathrm{~K} \mathrm{~kg} \mathrm{~mol}^{-1} \times 1.8 \mathrm{~g} \times 1000 \mathrm{~g} \mathrm{~kg}^{-1}}{0.88 \mathrm{~K} \times 90 \mathrm{~g}}\)
= 58 g mol-1
Therefore, molar mass of the solute, M2 = 58 g mol-1

Question 9.
45 g of ethylene glycol (C2H6O2) is mixed with 600 g of water. Calculate
(a) the freezing point depression and
(b) the freezing point of the solution.
Answer:
Depression in freezing point is related to the molality, therefore, the molality of the solution with respect to ethylene glycol
moles of ethylene glycol mass of water in kilogram
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 2 Solutions 34
Moles of ethylene glycol = \(\frac{45 \mathrm{~g}}{62 \mathrm{~g} \mathrm{~mol}^{-1}}\)
= 0.73 mol
Mass of water in kg = \(\frac{600 \mathrm{~g}}{1000 \mathrm{~g} \mathrm{~kg}^{-1}}\) = 0.6 kg
Hence molality of ethylene glycol = \(\frac{0.73 \mathrm{~g}}{0.60 \mathrm{~kg}}\)
= 1.2 mol kg-1
Therefore freezing point depression.
ΔT1 = 1.86K kg mol-1 × 1.2 mol kg-1 = 2.2K
Freezing point of the aqueous solution
= 273.15 K – 2.2 K = 270.95 K

Question 10.
1.00 g of a non – electrolyte solute dissolved in 50 g of benzene lowered the freezing point of benzene by 0.40 K. The freezing
point depression constant of benzene is 5.12 K mol-1. Find the molar mass of the solute.
Answer:
Substituting the values of various terms involved in equation (2.36) we get.
M2 = \(\frac{5.12 \mathrm{~K} \mathrm{~kg} \mathrm{~mol}^{-1} \times 1.00 \mathrm{~g} \times 1000 \mathrm{~g} \mathrm{~kg}^{-1}}{0.40 \times 50 \mathrm{~g}}\)
= 256 g mol-1
Thus, molar mass of the solute = 256 g mol-1

Question 11.
200 cm3 of an aqueous solution of a protein contains 1.26 g of the protein. The osmotic pressure of such a solution at 300 K is found to be 2.57 × 10-3 bar. Calculate the molar mass of the protein.
Answer:
The various quantities known to us are as follows : π = 2.57 × 10-3 bar,
V = 200 cm3 = 0.200 litre
T = 300 K
R = 0.083 L bar mol-1K-1
Substituting these values in equation (2.42) we get
M2 = \(\frac{1.26 \mathrm{~g} \times 0.083 \mathrm{~L} \mathrm{bar} \mathrm{K}^{-1} \mathrm{~mol}^{-1} \times 300 \mathrm{~K}}{2.57 \times 10^{-3} \mathrm{bar} \times 0.200 \mathrm{~L}}\)
= 61.022 g mol-1

Question 12.
2 g of benzoic acid (C6H5COOH) dissolved in 25 g of benzene shows a depression in freezing point equal 101.62K. Molal depression constant for benzene is 4.9 K kg mol-1. What is the percentage association of acid if it forms dimer in solution?
Answer:
The given quantities are : w2 = 2 g;
Kf = 4.9 K kg mol-1 ; w1 = 25 g,
ΔTf = 1.62 K
Substituting these values in equation (2.36) we get:
M2 = \(\frac{4.9 \mathrm{~K} \mathrm{~kg} \mathrm{~mol}^{-1} \times 2 \mathrm{~g} \times 1000 \mathrm{~g} \mathrm{~kg}^{-1}}{25 \mathrm{~g} \times 1.62 \mathrm{~K}}\)
= 241.98 g mol-1
Thus, experimental molar mass of benzoic acid in benzene is = 241.98 g mol-1
Now consider the following equilibrium for the acid:
2C6H5COOH \(\rightleftharpoons\) (C6H5COOH)2
If x represents the degree of association of the solute then we would have (1 – x) mol of benzoic acid left in unassociated form and correspondingly \(\frac{x}{2}\) as associated moles of benzoic acid at equilibrium. Therefore, total number of moles of particles at equilibrium is :
1 – x + \(\frac{x}{2}\) = 1 – \(\frac{x}{2}\)
Thus, total number of moles of particles at equilibrium equals van’t Hoff factor i.
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 2 Solutions 35
Therefore, degree of association of benzoic acid in benzene is 99.2%.

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 2 Solutions

Question 13.
0.6 mL of acetic acid (CH3COOH), having density 1.06 g mL-1, is dissolved in 1 litre of water. The depression in freezing point observed for this strength of acid was 0.0205°C. Calculate the van’t Hoff factor and the dissociation constant of acid.
Answer:
Number of moles of acetic acid
= \(\frac{0.6 \mathrm{~mL} \times 1.06 \mathrm{~g} \mathrm{~mL}^{-1}}{60 \mathrm{~g} \mathrm{~mol}^{-1}}\) = 0.0106 mol = n
Molarity = \(\frac{0.0106 \mathrm{~mol}}{1000 \mathrm{~mL} \times 1 \mathrm{~g} \mathrm{~mL}^{-1}}\)
= 0.0106 mol kg-1
Using equation (2.35)
∆Tf = 1.86 K kg mol-1 × 0.0106 mol kg-1 = 0.0197K
van’t Hoff factor
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 2 Solutions 36
Acetic acid is a weak electrolyte and will dissociate into two ions : acetate and hydrogen ions per molecule of acetic acid. If x is the degree of dissociation of acetic acid, then we would have n (1 – x) moles of undisso-ciated acetic acid, nx moles of CH3COO and nx moles of H+ ions.
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 2 Solutions 37
Thus total moles of particles are :
n(1 – x + x + x) = n(1 + x)
i = \(\frac{n(1+x)}{n}\) = 1 + x = 1.041
Thus degree of dissociation of acetic acid = x = 1.041 – 1.000 = 0.041
Then [CH3COOH] = n(1 – x)
= 0.0106 ( 1 – 0.041),
[CH3COO] = nx = 0.0106 × 0.041, [H+]
= nx = 0.0106 × 0.041.
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 2 Solutions 38

TS Inter 1st Year Maths 1A Functions Important Questions Very Short Answer Type

Students must practice these Maths 1A Important Questions TS Inter 1st Year Maths 1A Functions Important Questions Very Short Answer Type to help strengthen their preparations for exams.

TS Inter 1st Year Maths 1A Functions Important Questions Very Short Answer Type

Question 1.
If the function f is defined by
TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Functions Important Questions Very Short Answer Type 1
then find the 2x +1, x < -3 values if exist of f(4), f(2.5), f(- 2), f(- 4), f(0), f(- 7). [Mar 14]
Answer:
(i) f(4) For x > 3, f(x) = 3x – 2
f(4) = 3 (4) – 2 = 12 – 2 = 10

(ii) f(2.5) is not defined.

(iii) f(-2)
For – 2 ≤ x ≤ 2, f(x) = x2 – 2
f(- 2) = (- 2)2 – 2 = 4 – 2 = 2

(iv) f(-4)
For x < – 3, f(x) = 2x + 1
f(- 4) = 2(- 4) + 1 = – 8 + 1 = – 7

(v) f(0)
For – 2 ≤ x ≤ 2, f(x) = x2 – 2
f(0) = 02 – 2 = – 2

(vi) f(- 7)
For x < – 3, f(x) = 2x + 1
f(- 7) = 2 (- 7) + 1 = – 14 + 1 = – 13

TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Functions Important Questions Very Short Answer Type

If the function f is defined by
TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Functions Important Questions Very Short Answer Type 2
then find the values of
(i) f(3)
(ii) f(0)
(iii) f(-1.5)
(iv) f(2) + f(-2)
(v) f(- 5).
Answer:
(i) 5
(ii) 2
(iii) – 2.5
(iv) 1
(v) not defined

Question 2.
If A = \(\left\{0, \frac{\pi}{6}, \frac{\pi}{4}, \frac{\pi}{3}, \frac{\pi}{2}\right\}\) and f: A → B is a surjection defined by f(x) = cos x then find B. [Mar. (TS) 17, 16 (AP), 11 May 15 (AP), 15 (TS), 11]
Answer:
Given A = \(\left\{0, \frac{\pi}{6}, \frac{\pi}{4}, \frac{\pi}{3}, \frac{\pi}{2}\right\}\)
f(x) = cos x
Since f: A → B is a surjection then f(A) = B
f(0) = cos 0 = 1
TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Functions Important Questions Very Short Answer Type 3
∴ B = Range . f(A) = {1, \(\frac{\sqrt{3}}{2}, \frac{1}{\sqrt{2}}, \frac{1}{2}\), o}

If A = {- 2, – 1, 0, 1, 2} and f: A → B is a surjection defined by f(x) = x2 + x + 1, then find B. [Mar. (AP) 19, 17] [Mar 16 (TS): May 14, 10]
Answer:
{3, 1, 7}

If A = {1, 2, 3, 4} and f: A → R is a function defined by f(x) = \(\frac{x^2-x+1}{x+1}\), then find the range of f.
Answer:
\(\left\{1, \frac{1}{2}, \frac{7}{4}, \frac{13}{5}\right\}\)

Question 3.
Determine whether the function f: R → R defined by
TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Functions Important Questions Very Short Answer Type 4
is an injection or a surjection or a bijection.
Answer:
Given f: R → R
TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Functions Important Questions Very Short Answer Type 5
If x = 3 > 2 then f(3) = 3
If x = 1 <2 then f(1) = 5(1) – 2 = 5 – 2 = 3
∴ 1 and 3 have same f image,
∴ f is not an injection.
If y ∈ R (co-domain) then y = x
x = y
then f (x) = x
f(x) = y
If y ∈ R (co-domain) then y = 5x – 2
y + 2 = 5x
x = \(\frac{y+2}{5}\)
then f (x) = 5x – 2
TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Functions Important Questions Very Short Answer Type 6
= y + 2 – 2 = y
∴ f is a surjection since f is not an injection then it is not a bijection.

TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Functions Important Questions Very Short Answer Type

Question 4.
If f: R → R, g : R → R are defined by f(x) = 4x – 1 and g(x) = x2 + 2 then find [May 09. Mar. 05, 04]
(i)(gof) (x)
(ii) (gof) \(\left(\frac{a+1}{4}\right)\)
(iii) (fof) (x)
(iv) [go (fof)] (0)
Answer:
Given f: R → R, g: R → R
f(x) = 4x – 1 and g(x) = x2 + 2

(i) (gof) (x) = g [f(x)] = g[4x – 1]
= (4x – 1)2 + 2
= 16x2 + 1 – 8x + 2
= 16x2 – 8x + 3

(ii) (gof) \(\left(\frac{a+1}{4}\right)\) = g \(\left[\mathrm{f}\left(\frac{\mathrm{a}+1}{4}\right)\right]\)
= g\(\left[4\left(\frac{a+1}{4}\right)-1\right]\)
= g[a + 1 – 1 ]
= g(a) = a2 + 2

(iii) (fof) (x) = f [f(x)] = f[4x – 1]
= 4 (4x – 1) – 1
= 16x – 4 – 1
= 16x – 5

(iv) [go (fof)] (0)
Now (fof) (0) = f[f(0)] = f[4(0) – 1] = f(- 1)
= 4( – 1) – 1 = – 4 – 1 = – 5
[go (fof)] (0) = go [(fof)(0)]
= g [- 5] = (- 5)2 + 2
= 25 + 2 = 27

Question 5.
If f: Q → Q is defined by f(x) = 5x + 4 for all x ∈ Q, show that ‘f is a bijection and find f-1. [Mar. 17 (TS). 16 (AP)]
Answer:
Given f: Q → Q, f(x) = 5x + 4, ∀ x ∈ Q
Let a1, a2 ∈ Q
f(a1) = f(a2)
5a1 + 4 = 5a2 + 4
5a1 = 5a2
a1 = a2
∴ f: Q → Q is an one – one function.
Let y ∈ Q (co-domain) then y = 5x + 4
y – 4 = 5x
TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Functions Important Questions Very Short Answer Type 7
f(x) = y
∴ f: Q → Q is an onto function.
∴ f: Q → Q is a bijection.
∴ f-1: Q → Q is a bijection.

Question 6.
If f : R → R, g : R → R are defined by f(x) = 3x – 1, g(x) = x2 + 1, then find (fog) (2). [Mar. 18 (AP) May 13; Mar 13]
Answer:
Given f: R → R and g : R → R defined by
f(x) = 3x – 1 ; g(x) = x2 + 1
(fog) (2) = f[g(2)] = f(22 + 1)
= f(5) = 3(5) – 1 = 14

TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Functions Important Questions Very Short Answer Type

Question 7.
If f(x) = \(\frac{1}{x}\), g (x) = √x for all x ∈ (0, ∞), x then find (gof) (x).
Answer:
Given
f(x) = \(\frac{1}{x}\), g(x) = √x ∀ x ∈ (0, ∞)
Now (gof) (x) = g[f(x)] = g \(\left[\frac{1}{x}\right]\) = \(\sqrt{\frac{1}{x}}=\frac{1}{\sqrt{x}}\)

Question 8.
If f(x) = 2x – 1, g(x) = \(\frac{x+1}{2}\) for all x ∈ R, then find (gof) (x). [Mar 19 (AP); Sep 92]
Answer:
Given f(x) = 2x – 1, g(x) \(\frac{x+1}{2}\) ∀ x ∈ R
Now (gof) (x) = g[f(x)] = g(2x – 1)
= \(\frac{2 \mathrm{x}-1+1}{2}\) = \(\frac{2 x}{2x}\) = x

Question 9.
If f(x) = 2, g(x) = x2, h(x) = 2x for all x ∈ R, then find [fo(goh)] (x). [Mar. 17 (TS); July 01]
Answer:
Given f(x) = 2, g(x) = x2, h(x) = 2x ∀ x ∈ R.
Now (goh) (x) = g[h(x)] = g[2x] = (2x)2 = 4x2
[fo(goh)](x) = f[(goh) (x)] = f[4x2] = 2

Question 10.
Find the inverse function of f(x) = ax + b, (a ≠ 0); a, b ∈ R [Mar. 18 (TS); Mar. 13]
Answer:
Given, a, b ∈ R, f: R → R and
f(x) = ax + b
Let y = f(x) = ax + b
y = f(x) ⇒ x = f -1 (y) …………….. (1)
y = ax + b ⇒ ax = y – b ⇒ x = \(\frac{\mathrm{y}-\mathrm{b}}{\mathrm{a}}\) ……………… (2)
From (1) and (2)
f-1(y) = \(\frac{y-b}{a}\) ⇒ f-1(x) = \(\frac{x-b}{a}\)

If f: Q → Q is defined by f(x) = 5x + 4, for all x ∈ Q, find f-1. [Mar. 12, 10]
Answer:
\(\frac{x-4}{5}\)

Question 11.
Find the inverse function of f(x) = 5x [Mar. 15 (AP); Mar. ’11’, 06]
Answer:
Given f(x) = 5x
Let y = f(x) = 5x
y = f(x) ⇒ x = f-1(y) …………………. (1)
y = 5x ⇒ x = log5y ……………………. (2)
From (1) and (2),
f-1(y) = log5y ⇒ f-1 (x) = log5x

Question 12.
If f: R → R, g: R → R defined by f(x) = 3x – 2, g(x) = x2 + 1, then find (i) (gof-1) (2) (ii) (gof) (x – 1). [Mar. 08; May 06]
Answer:
Given f: R → R, g: R → R, f(x) = 3x – 2, g(x) = x2 – 1
Let y = f(x) = 3x – 2
y = f(x) ⇒ x = f-1 ……………. (1)
y = 3x – 2 ⇒ y + 2 = 3x
x = \(\frac{\mathrm{y}+2}{3}\) ………………….. (2)
From (1) & (2)
f-1(y) = \(\frac{\mathrm{y}+2}{3}\)
⇒ f-1 (x) = \(\frac{\mathrm{x}+2}{3}\)

TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Functions Important Questions Very Short Answer Type

(i) (gof-1) (2)
= g[f-1 (2)]
TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Functions Important Questions Very Short Answer Type 8

(ii) (gof) (x – 1)
= g[f(x -1)]
= g[3(x – 1) – 2]
= g[3x – 3 – 2]
= g(3x – 5)
= (3x – 5)2 + 1
= 9x2 + 25 – 30x + 1
= 9x2 – 30x + 26

Question 13.
If f(x) = \(\frac{x+1}{x-1}\) (x ≠ ± 1), then find (fofof) (x) [Mar. 05]
Answer:
Given f(x) = \(\frac{x+1}{x-1}\) (x ≠ ± 1)
TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Functions Important Questions Very Short Answer Type 9

If f(x) = \(\) (x ≠ ± 1), then find (fofofof) (x)
Answer:
x

Question 14.
Find the domain of the real valued function f(x) = \(\sqrt{a^2-x^2}\) [June 04]
Answer:
Given f(x) = \(\sqrt{a^2-x^2}\) ∈ R
⇒ a2 – x2 ≥ 0
⇒ x2 – a2 ≤ 0
⇒ (x + a) (x – a) ≤ 0
– a ≤ x ≤ a
TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Functions Important Questions Very Short Answer Type 10
⇒ x ∈ [-a, a]
∴ Domain of ‘f is [-a, a]

Find the domain of the real valued function f(x) = \(\sqrt{16-x^2}\).
Answer:
[- 4, 4]

Find the domain of the real valued function f(x) = \(\sqrt{9-x^2}\).
Answer:
[-3, 3]

TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Functions Important Questions Very Short Answer Type

Question 15.
Find the domain of the real valued function
f(x) = \(\frac{1}{\left(x^2-1\right)(x+3)}\). [May 14, 93; Mar. 14]
Answer:
Given f(x) = \(\frac{1}{\left(x^2-1\right)(x+3)}\)
f(x) = \(\frac{1}{\left(x^2-1\right)(x+3)}\) ∈ R
⇒ (x2 – 1) (x + 3) ≠ 0
x2 – 1 ≠ 0, x + 3 ≠ 0
x2 ≠ 1, x ≠ – 3
x ≠ ± 1
∴ x ≠ -3, -1, 1
∴ Domain of ‘f is R – {-3, -1, 1}

Find the domain of the real valued function f(x) = \(\frac{1}{6 x-x^2-5}\).
Answer:
R – {1, 5}

Find the domain of the real valued function f(x) = \(\frac{2 x^2-5 x+7}{(x-1)(x-2)(x-3)}\)
Answer:
R- {1, 2, 3}

Question 16.
Find the domain of the real valued function f(x) = \(\sqrt{4 x-x^2}\). [May 12, 10] [Mar; 18 (TS)]
Answer:
Given, f(x) = \(\sqrt{4 x-x^2}\) ∈ R
⇒ x(4 – x) ≥ 0
TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Functions Important Questions Very Short Answer Type 11
⇒ x(4 – x) ≥ 0
⇒ x(x-4) ≤ 0
⇒ (x – 0) (x – 4) ≤ 0
⇒ 0 ≤ x ≤ 4
∴ Domain of ‘f’ is [0, 4].

Question 17.
Find the domain of the real valued function f(x) = \(\frac{1}{\sqrt{1-x^2}}\)
Answer:
Given f(x) = \(\frac{1}{\sqrt{1-x^2}}\) ∈ R
TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Functions Important Questions Very Short Answer Type 12
⇔ 1 – x2 > 0 “
⇔ (1 + x) (1 – x) > 0
⇔ x ∈ (-1, 1)
∴ Domain of T = {x/x ∈ (-1, 1)}

Question 18.
Find the domain of the real valued function f(x) = \(\sqrt{\mathbf{x}^2-25}\) [May 15 (AP); Mar. 12]
Answer:
Given f(x) = \(\sqrt{x^2-25}\) ∈ R
⇒ x2 – 25 ≥ 0
⇒ (x + 5) (x – 5) ≥ 0
⇒ x < -5 or x > 5
⇒ x ∈ (- α, -5] ∪ [5, α)
∴ Domain of T is (-α, -5] ∪ [5, α).
TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Functions Important Questions Very Short Answer Type 13

TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Functions Important Questions Very Short Answer Type

Question 19.
Find the domain of the real valued function f(x) = log (x2 – 4x + 3) [Mar. 16 (TS), 10, ‘08 ; May 11, 07]
Answer:
Given f(x) = log (x2 – 4x + 3) ∈ R
⇒ x2 – 4x + 3 > 0
⇒ x2 – 3x – x + 3 > 0
⇒ x (x – 3) – 1 (x – 3) > 0
⇒ (x – 1) (x – 3) > 0
⇒ x < 1 or x > 3
⇒ x ∈ (- α, 1) ∪ (3, α)
TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Functions Important Questions Very Short Answer Type 14

Question 20.
Find the domain of the real valued function f(x) = \(\frac{\sqrt{3+x}+\sqrt{3-x}}{x}\)
Answer:
Given f(x) = \(\frac{\sqrt{3+x}+\sqrt{3-x}}{x}\) ∈ R
⇒ 3 + x ≥ 0 and 3 – x ≥ 0, x ≠ 0
x ≥ – 3 and 3 ≥ x, x ≠ 0, x ≤ 3
x ∈ [- 3, ∝) ∩ (-∝, 3) – {0}
⇒ x ∈ [- 3, 3] – {0}
(or)
⇒ x ∈ [- 3, 0) ∪ (0, 3]
∴ Domain of ‘f is [- 3, 3] – {0}
TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Functions Important Questions Very Short Answer Type 15

Find the domain of the real valued function f(x) = \(\frac{\sqrt{2+x}+\sqrt{2-x}}{x}\).
Answer:
[- 2, 0) ∪ (0, 2]

Question 21.
Find the range of the reed valued function, log |4 – x2|.
Answer:
Let y = f(x) = log |4 – x2|
f(x) ∈ R ⇒ 4 – x2 ≠ 0
x2 ≠ 4 ⇒ x ≠ ± 2
∴ Domain of ‘f is R – {- 2, 2}
∴ y = loge |4 – x2|
|4 – x2| = ey
⇒ ey > 0, ∀ y ∈ R
∴ Range of T is R.

Question 22.
Find the range of the real valued function. \(\frac{x^2-4}{x-2}\) [May 03, 97]
Answer:
Let y = f(x) = \(\frac{x^2-4}{x-2}\)
f(x) ∈ R ⇒ x – 2 ≠ 0 ⇒ x ≠ 2
∴ Domain of ‘f is R – {2}
Let y = \(\frac{x^2-4}{x-2}\), if x ≠ 2 then y = x + 2
If x = 2, then y = 2 + 2 = 4
y is not defined at x = 2, then y cannot be equal to 4.
∴ Range of T is R – {4}.

TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Functions Important Questions Very Short Answer Type

Question 23.
Find the domain and range of the function f(x) = \(\frac{x}{2-3 x}\)
Answer:
Given f(x) = \(\frac{x}{2-3 x}\) ∈ R
⇒ 2 – 3x ≠ 0
⇒ 2 ≠ 3x
⇒ x ≠ \(\frac{2}{3}\)
∴ Domain of ‘f’ is R – \(\left\{\frac{2}{3}\right\}\)
Let y = f(x) = \(\frac{x}{2-3 x}\)
∴ y = \(\frac{x}{2-3 x}\)
2y – 3xy = x ⇒ 2y = x + 3x ⇒ 2y = x(1 + 3y)
TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Functions Important Questions Very Short Answer Type 16

Question 24.
If f = {(4, 5), (5, 6), (6, – 4)} and g = {(4, -4), (6, 5), (8, 5)}, then find
(i) f + 4
(ii) fg
(iii) √f
(iv) f2.
Answer:
(i) f + 4
Domain of f + 4 = A = {4, 5, 6}
(f + 4) (x) = f(x) + 4
(f + 4) (4) = f(4) + 4 = 5 + 4 = 9
(f + 4) (5) = f(5) + 4 = 6 + 4= 10
(f + 4) (6) = f(6) + 4 = -4 + 4 = 0
∴ f + 4 = {(4, 9), (5, 10), (6, 0)}

(ii) fg
Domain of fg = A ∩ B = {4, 6}
(fg) (x) = f(x) . g(x)
(fg) (4) = f(4) . g(4) = 5(-4) = -20
(fg) (6) = f(6) . g(6) = (-4) (5) = -20
∴ fg = {(4, -20), (6, – 20)}

(iii) √f
Domain of √f = {4, 5, 6} = A
√f (x) = √f(x)
√f(4) = √f(4) = √5
√f (5) = √f(5) = √6
√f (6) = √f(6) = √-4 (does not exist)
∴ √f = {(4, √5), (5, √6)}

(iv) f2
Domain of f2 = A = {4, 5, 6}
f2(x) = [f(x)]2
f2(4) = [f(4)]2 = (5)2 = 25
f2(5) = [f(5)]2 = (6)2 = 36
f2(6) = [f(6)]2 = (- 4)2 = 16
∴ f2 = {(4, 25), (5, 36), (6, 16)}

TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Functions Important Questions Very Short Answer Type

If f = {(1, 2), (2, -3), (3, -1)}, then find
(i) 2f [Mar. 12; 94, 90; May 94]
(ii) 2 + f [Mar. 12; May 08]
(iii) f2 [Mar. 08, May. 95, 90]
(iv) √f
Answer:
(i) {(1, 4), (2, -6), (3, -2)}
(ii) {(1, 4), (2, -1), (3, 1)}
(iii) {(1, 4), (2, 9), (3, 1)}
(iv) {(1, √2)}

TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 6 Work, Energy and Power

Telangana TSBIE TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material 6th Lesson Work, Energy and Power Textbook Questions and Answers.

TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material 6th Lesson Work, Energy and Power

Very Short Answer Type Questions

Question 1.
If a bomb at rest explodes into two pieces, the pieces must travel in opposite directions. Explain.
Answer:
Explosion is due to internal forces. In law of conservation of linear momentum internal forces cannot change the momentum of the system. So after explosion m1v1 + m2v2 = 0 or m1v1 = – m2v2 ⇒ they will fly in opposite directions.

Question 2.
State the conditions under which a force does no work.
Answer:

  1. When force (F) and displacement (S) are mutually perpendicular then work done is zero.
    ∵ W = \(\overline{\mathrm{F}}.\overline{\mathrm{S}}\) = |F| |S| cos θ when θ = 90° work W = 0
  2. Even though force is applied if displacement is zero then work done W = 0.

Question 3.
Define Work, Power and Energy. State their S.I. units.
Answer:
Work :
The product of force and displacement along the direction of force is called work.
Work done W = \(\overline{\mathrm{F}}.\overline{\mathrm{S}}\)
= \(|\overline{\mathrm{F}}||\overline{\mathrm{S}}|\) cos θ
S.I. unit of work is Joule.
Dimensional formula : ML²T-2.

Power :
The rate of doing work is called power.
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 6 Work, Energy and Power 1
S.I. unit: Watt;
D.F. : ML²T-3

Energy :
It is the capacity or ability of the body to do work. By spending energy we can do work or by doing work energy contentment of the body will increase.
S.I. unit: Joule ; D.F. : MML²T-2

Question 4.
State the relation between the kinetic energy and momentum of a body.
Answer:
Kinetic energy K.E = \(\frac{1}{2}\)mv² ;
momentum \(\overline{\mathrm{p}}\) = mv
Relation between P and KE is
K.E = p²/2m. ⇒ P = \(\sqrt{K.E.2m}\)

TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 6 Work, Energy and Power

Question 5.
State the sign of work done by a force in the following.
a) Work done by a man in lifting a bucket out of a well by means of a rope tied to the bucket.
b) Work done by gravitational force in the above case.
Answer:
a) When a bucket is lifted out of well work is done against gravity so work done is negative.

b) Work done by gravitational force is positive.

Question 6.
State the sign of work done by a force in the following.
a) work done by friction on a body sliding down an inclined plane.
b) work done gravitational force in the above case.
Answer:
a) Work done by friction while sliding down is negative. Because it opposes downward motion of the body.

b) Work done by gravitational force when a body is sliding down is positive.

Question 7.
State the sign of work done by a force in the following.
a) work done by an applied force on a body moving on a rough horizontal plane with uniform velocity.
b) work done by the resistive force of air on a vibrating pendulum in bringing it to rest.
Answer:
a) Work done against the direction of motion of a body moving on a horizontal plane is negative.

b) In pendulum a∝ – y. So work done by air resistance to bring it to rest is considered as positive.

Question 8.
State if each of the following statements is true or false. Give reasons for your answer.
a) Total energy of a system is always conserved, no matter what internal and external forces on the body are present
b) The work done by earth’s gravitational force in keeping the moon in its orbit for its one revolution is zero.
Answer:
a) Law of conservation of energy states that energy can be neither created nor destroyed. This rule is applicable to internal forces and also for external forces when they are conservative forces.

b) Gravitational forces are conservative forces. Work done by conservative force around a closed path is zero.

Question 9.
Which physical quantity remains constant (i) in an elastic collision (ii) in an inelastic collision?
Answer:
In elastic collision :
P and K.E. are conserved, (remains constant)

In inelastic collision :
only momentum is conserved, (remains constant)

Question 10.
A body freely falling from a certain height ‘h’, after striking a smooth floor rebounds and h rises to a height h/2. What is the coefficient of restitution between the floor and the body?
Answer:
Given that, h1 = h and h2 = \(\frac{h}{2}\)
We know that coefficient of restitution.
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 6 Work, Energy and Power 2

Question 11.
What is the total displacement of freely falling body, after successive rebounds from the same place of ground, before it comes to stop? Assume that V is the coefficient of restitution between the body and the ground.
Answer:
Total displacement of a freely falling body after successive rebounds from the same place of ground, before it comes to stop is equal to height (h) from which the body is dropped.

Short Answer Questions

Question 1.
What is potential energy? Derive an expression for the gravitational potential energy.
Answer:
Potential energy :
It is the energy possessed by a body by the virtue of its position.
Ex: Energy stored in water a over head tank, wound spring.
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 6 Work, Energy and Power 3

Equation for potential energy :
Let a body of mass m is lifted through a height ‘h’ above the ground. Where ground is taken as refe-rence. In this process we are doing some work.

Work done against gravity W = m.g.h.
i. e., Force × displacement along the direction of force applied. This work done is stored in the body in the form of potential energy. Because work and energy can be interchanged.
∴ Potential Energy P.E. = mgh.

TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 6 Work, Energy and Power

Question 2.
A lorry and a car moving with the same momentum are brought to rest by the application of brakes, which provide equal retarding forces. Which of them will come to rest in shorter time? Which will come to rest in less distance?
Answer:
Momentum (\(\overline{\mathrm{P}}\) = mv) is same for both lorry and car.
Work done to stop a body = Kinetic energy stored
∴ W = F. S = \(\frac{1}{2}\) mv² = K.E. But force applied by brakes is same for lorry and car.
Relation between \(\overline{\mathrm{P}}\) on K.E. is
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 6 Work, Energy and Power 4

So lighter body (car) will travel longer distance when P, F are same.
Then mS = constant.
∴ So car travels longer distance than lorry before it is stopped.

Question 3.
Distinguish between conservative and non-conservative forces with one example each.
Answer:
i) Conservative forces :
If work done by the force around a closed path is zero and it is independent of the path then such forces are called conservative forces.

Example:

  1. Work done in lifting a body in gravitational field. When the body returns to its original position work done on it is zero.
    So gravitational forces are conservative forces.
  2. Let a charge ‘q’ is moved in an electric field on a closed path then change in its electric potential i.e., static forces are conservative forces.

ii) Non-conservative forces :
For non-conservative forces work done by a force around a closed path is not equal to zero and it is dependent on the path.
Ex: Work done to move a body against friction. While taking a body between two points say A & B. We have to do work to move the body from A to B and also work is done to move the body from B to A. As result, the work done in moving the body in a closed path is not equals to zero. So frictional forces are non-conservative forces.

Question 4.
Show that in the case of one dimensional elastic collision, the relative velocity of approach of two colliding bodies before collision is equal to the relative velocity of separation after collision.
Answer:
To show relative velocity of approach of two colliding bodies before collision is equal to relative velocity of separation after collision.

Let two bodies of masses m1, m2 are moving with velocities u1, u2 along the straight line in same direction collided elastically.

Let their velocities after collision be v1 and v2.
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 6 Work, Energy and Power 5

According to the law of conservation of linear momentum
m1u1 + m2u2 = m1v1 + m2v2 or m1(u1 – v1) = m2(v2 – u2) ………… (1)

According to law of conservation of kinetic energy
\(\frac{1}{2}\)m11 + \(\frac{1}{2}\)m2u²2 = \(\frac{1}{2}\)m12 + \(\frac{1}{2}\)m22
m1(u²1 – v²1) = m2(v²2 – u²2) ………. (2)
Dividing eqn. (2) by (1)
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 6 Work, Energy and Power 6
u1 + v1 = v2 + u2 ⇒ u1 – u2 = v2 – v1 ……. (3)
i.e., relative velocity of approach of the two bodies before collision = relative velocity of separation of the two bodies after collision. So coefficient of restitution is equal to ‘1’.

Question 5.
Show that two equal masses undergo oblique elastic collision will move at right angles after collision, if the second body initially at rest.
Answer:
Consider two bodies possess equal mass (m) and they undergo oblique elastic collision.

Let the first body moving with initial velocity ‘u’ collides with the second body at rest.
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 6 Work, Energy and Power 7

In elastic collision, momentum is conserved. So, conservation of momentum along X-axis yields.
mu = mv1 cos θ1 + mv2 cos θ2.
(i.e.) u = v1 cos θ1 + v2 cos θ2 ……. (1)
along Y-axis
0 = v1 sin θ1 – v2 sin θ2 ……… (2)
squaring and adding eq. (1) and (2) we get
u² = v²1 + v²2 + 2v1v2 cos (θ1 + θ2) …. (3)
As the collision is elastic,
Kinetic Energy (K.E.) is also conserved.

From eq. (3) and (4) 2v1v2 cos(θ1 + θ2) = 0
As it is given that v1 ≠ 0 and v2 ≠ 0
∴ cos(θ1 + θ2) = 0 or θ1 + θ2 = 90°.
The two equal masses undergoing oblique elastic collision will move at right angles after collision, if the second body initially at rest.

TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 6 Work, Energy and Power

Question 6.
Derive an expression for the height attained by a freely falling body after ‘n’ number of rebounds from the floor.
Answer:
Let a small ball be dropped from a height ‘h’ on a horizontal smooth plate. Let it rebounds to a height ‘h1‘.
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 6 Work, Energy and Power 8

Velocity with which it strikes the plate u1 = \(\sqrt{2gh}\)
Velocity with which it leaves the plate v1 = \(\sqrt{2gh_1}\)

The velocity of plate before and after collision is zero i.e., u2 = 0, v2 = 0
Coefficient of restitution,
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 6 Work, Energy and Power 9
For 2nd rebound it goes to a height
h2 = e²h1 = e²e²h = e4h

For 3rd rebound it goes to a height
h3 = e²h2 = e²e4h = e6h

For nth rebound height attained
hn = e2nh.

Question 7.
Explain the law of conservation of energy.
Answer:
Law of conservation of energy:
Wien forces doing work on a system are conservative then total energy of the system is constant i.e., energy can neither be created nor destroyed.
i.e., Total energy = (K + u) = constant form.

Explanation :
Consider a body undergoes small displacement ∆x under the action of conservative force F. According to work energy theorem.
Change in K.E = work done
∆K = F(x)∆x ………….. (1)
but Potential energy Au = -F(x)∆x ………….. (2)
from (1) and (2) = ∆K = – ∆u
⇒ ∆(K + u) = 0
Hence (K + u) = constant
i.e., sum of the kinetic energy and potential energy of the body is a constant

Since the universe may be considered as an isolated system, the total energy of the universe is constant.

Long Answer Questions

Question 1.
Develop the notions of work and kinetic energy and show that it leads to work- energy theorem. State the conditions under which a force does no work. [AP Mar. I 7, 15, May 1 7; TS Mar. 15]
Answer:
Work :
The product of component of force in the direction of displacement and the magnitude of displacement is called work.
W = \(\overline{\mathrm{F}}.\overline{\mathrm{S}}\)
When \(\overline{\mathrm{F}}\) and \(\overline{\mathrm{S}}\) are parallel W = \(|\overline{\mathrm{F}}|\times|\overline{\mathrm{S}}|\)
When \(\overline{\mathrm{F}}\) and \(\overline{\mathrm{S}}\) has some angle 6 between them
W = \(\overline{\mathrm{F}}.\overline{\mathrm{S}}\) cos θ
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 6 Work, Energy and Power 10

Kinetic energy :
Energy possessed by a moving body is called kinetic energy (k)

The kinetic energy of an object is a measure of the work that an object can do by the virtue of its motion.

Kinetic energy can be measured with equation K = \(\frac{1}{2}\)mv²
Ex : All moving bodies contain kinetic energy.

Work energy theorem (For variable force):
Work done by a variable force is always equal to the change in kinetic energy of the body.
Work done W = \(\frac{1}{2}\)mV² – \(\frac{1}{2}\)mV²0? = Kf – Ki

Proof :
Kinetic energy of a body K = \(\frac{1}{2}\)mv²
Time rate of change of kinetic energy is
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 6 Work, Energy and Power 11

When force is conservative force F = F(x)
∴ On integration over initial position (x1) and final position x2
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 6 Work, Energy and Power 12

i.e., work done by a conservative force is equal to change in kinetic energy of the body.
Condition for Force not to do any work.

When Force (\(\overline{\mathrm{F}}\)) and displacement (\(\overline{\mathrm{S}}\)) are perpendicular work done is zero, i.e., when
θ = 90° then W = \(\overline{\mathrm{F}}.\overline{\mathrm{S}}\) = 0

TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 6 Work, Energy and Power

Question 2.
What are collisions? Explain the possible types of collisions? Develop the theory of one dimensional elastic collision. [TS Mar.’ 18; AF Mar. 19. May 14]
Answer:
A process in which the motion of a system of particles changes but keeping the total momentum conserved is called collision.

Collisions are two types :

  1. elastic
  2. inelastic.

To show relative velocity of approach before collision is equal to relative velocity of separation after collision.

Let two bodies of masses m1, m2 are moving with velocities u1, u2 along the same line in same direction collided elastically.

Let their velocities after collision are v1 and v2.
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 6 Work, Energy and Power 13

According to the law of conservation of linear momentum
m1u1 + m2u2 = m1v1 + m2v2
or m1 ( u1 – v1 ) = m2 ( v2 – u2 ) ……… (1)

According to law of conservation of kinetic energy
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 6 Work, Energy and Power 14

i.e., In elastic collisions relative velocity of approach of the two bodies before collision = relative velocity of separation of the two bodies after collision.

Velocities of two bodies after elastic collision:
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 6 Work, Energy and Power 15

Question 3.
State and prove law of conservation of energy in case of a freely falling body. [TS Mar. ’19, ’17, ’16, May ’18, ’17, ’16, June ’15; AP Mar. ’18, ’16, ’15, May ’18, ’16, June ’15, May ’13]
Answer:
Law of conservation of energy :
Energy can neither be created nor destroyed. But it can be converted from one form into the another form so that the total energy will remains constant in a closed system.

Proof : In case of a freely fidling body :
Let a body of mass is dropped from a height H’ at point A.

Forces due to gravitational field are conservative forces, so total mechanical energy (E = P.E + K.E.) is constant i.e., neither destroyed nor created.
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 6 Work, Energy and Power 16

The conversion of potential energy to kinetic energy for a ball of mass ra dropped from a height H

1. At point H : Velocity of body v = 0
⇒ K = 0
Potential energy (u) = mgH
where H=height above the ground
T.E = u + K = mgH (1)

2. At point 0 :
i.e., just before touching the ground :
A constant force is a special case of specially dependent force F(x) so mechanical energy is conserved.
So energy at H = Energy at 0 = mgH

Proof:
At point ‘0’ height h = 0 ⇒
⇒ v = \(\sqrt{2gH}\) ; u = 0
K0 = \(\frac{1}{2}\) mv² = \(\frac{1}{2}\) m2gH = mgH
Total energy E = mgH + 0 = mgH ………….. (2)

3. At any point h:
Let height above ground = h
u = mgh, Kh = \(\frac{1}{2}\)mV²
where v = \(\sqrt{2g(h – x)}\)
∴ Velocity of the body when it falls through a height (h – x) is \(\sqrt{2g(h – x)}\)
∴ Total energy =mgh + \(\frac{1}{2}\)m2g(H – h)
⇒ E = mgh + mgH – mgh = mgH ………… (3)
From eq. 1, 2 & 3 total energy at any point is constant.
Hence, law of conservation of energy is proved.

Conditions to apply law of conservation of energy:

  1. Work done by internal forces is conservative.
  2. No work is done by external force.

When the above two conditions are satisfied then total mechanical energy of a system will remain constant.

Problems

Question 1.
A test tube of mass 10 grams closed with a cork of mass 1 gram contains some ether. When the test tube is heated the cork flies out under the presssure of the ether gas. The test tube is suspended horizontally by a weight less rigid bar of length 5 cm. What is the minimum velocity with which the cork should fly out of the tube, so that test tube describing a full vertical circle about the point O. Neglect the mass of ether.
Solution:
Length of bar, L = 5 cm, = \(\frac{5}{100}\), g = 10m/s²
For the cork not to come out minimum velocity at lowest point is, v = \(\sqrt{5gL}\). At this condition centrifugal and centripetal forces are balanced.
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 6 Work, Energy and Power 17

Question 2.
A machine gun fires 360 bullets per minute and each bullet travels with a velocity of 600 ms-1. If the mass of each bullet is 5 gm, find the power of the machine gun? [AP May ’16, ’13, June ’15, Mar. ’14; AP Mar. ’18. ’16; TS May ’18]
Solution:
Number of bullets, n = 360
Time, t = 1 minute = 60s
Velocty of the bullet, v = 600 ms-1 ; Mass of each bullet, m = 5gm = 5 × 10-3 kg
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 6 Work, Energy and Power 18
⇒ P = 5400W = 5.4KW

TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 6 Work, Energy and Power

Question 3.
Find the useful power used in pumping 3425 m³ of water per hour from a well 8 m deep to the surface, supposing 40% of the horse power during pumping is wasted. What is the horse power of the engine?
Solution:
Mass of water pumped, m = 3425 m³
= 3425 × 10³ kg.
Mass of lm³ water = 1000 kg
Depth of well d = 8 m., Power wasted = 40%
∴ efficiency, η = 60%
time, t = 1 hour = 3600 sec.
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 6 Work, Energy and Power 19

Question 4.
A pump is required to lift 600 kg of water per minute from a well 25m deep and to eject it with a speed of 50 ms-1. Calculate the power required to perform the above task? (g = 10 m sec-2) [TS Mar. ’19, ’16; AP May 18, Mar. 15, June 15]
Solution:
Mass of water m = 600 kg; depth = h = 25 m
Speed of water v = 25 m/s; g = 10 m/s², time t = 1 min = 60 sec.
Power of motor P = Power to lift water (P1) + Kinetic energy of water (K.E) per second.
Power to lift water
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 6 Work, Energy and Power 20
∴ Power of motor P = 2500 + 3125 = 5625 watt 5.625 K.W.

Question 5.
A block of mass 5 kg initially at rest at the origin is acted on by a force along the X-positive direction represented by F=(20 + 5x)N. Calculate the work done by the force during the displacement of the block from x = 0 to x = 4m.
Solution:
Mass of block, m = 5 kg
Force acting on the block, F = (20 + 5x) N
If ‘w’ is the total amount of work done to displace the block from x = 0 to x = 4m then,
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 6 Work, Energy and Power 21

Question 6.
A block of mass 5 kg is sliding down a smooth inclined plane as shown. The spring arranged near the bottom of the inclined plane has a force constant 600 N/m. Find the compression in the spring at the moment the velocity of the block is maximum?
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 6 Work, Energy and Power 22
Solution:
Mass of the block, m = 5kg
Force constant, K = 600 N m-1
From figure, sin θ = \(\frac{3}{5}\)
Force produced by the motion in the block,
F = mg sin0 ⇒ F = 5 × 9.8 × \(\frac{3}{5}\) = 29.4 N
But force constant K = \(\frac{F}{x}\) x
∴ x = \(\frac{F}{K}=\frac{29.5}{600}\) = 0.05m = 5cm

Question 7.
A force F = – \(\frac{K}{x^2}\) (x ≠ 0) acts on a particle along the X-axis. Find the work done by the force in displacing the particle from x = + a to x = + 2a. Take K as a positive constant.
Solution:
Force acting on the particle, F = –\(\frac{K}{x^2}\)
Total amount of work done to displace the particle from x = + a to x = + 2a is,
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 6 Work, Energy and Power 23

TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 6 Work, Energy and Power

Question 8.
A force F acting on a particle varies with the position x as shown in the graph. Find the work done by the force in displacing the particle from x = – a to x = + 2a?
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 6 Work, Energy and Power 24
Solution:
Average force acting on the particle, F = \(\frac{F}{K}\)

Amount of work done by the force to displace the particle from x = -a to x = +2a is,
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 6 Work, Energy and Power 25

Question 9.
From a height of 20 m above a horizontal floor, a ball is thrown down with initial velocity 20 m/s. After striking the floor, the ball bounces to the same height from which it was thrown. Find the coefficient of restitution for the collision between the ball and the floor? (g = 10 m/s²)
Solution:
Initial velocity = u¹ = 20 m/s, h – 20 m,
g = 10 m/s²

Velocity of approach,
u² = u = u +2as = 400+ 2 × 10 × 20
⇒ u² = 400 + 400 = 800 ⇒ u = 20√2
Height of rebounce = h = 20 m.
∴ Velocity of separation
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 6 Work, Energy and Power 26

Question 10.
A ball falls from a height of 10 m on to a hard horizontal floor and repeatedly bounces. If the coefficient of restitution is \(\frac{1}{\sqrt{2}\), then what is the total distance travelled by the ball before it ceases to rebound?
Solution:
Height from which the ball is allowed to fall, h = 10 m
Coefficient of restitution between the hard horizontal floor and the ball, e = \(\frac{1}{\sqrt{2}\)
∴ Total distance travelled by the ball before it ceases to rebound,
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 6 Work, Energy and Power 27

Question 11.
In a ballistics demonstration, a police officer fires a bullet of mass 50g with speed 200 msr1 on soft plywood of thickness 2 cm. The bullet emerges with only 10% of its initial kinetic energy. What is the emergent speed of the bullet?
Answer:
Mass of bullet m = 50g = 0.05 kg
Initial velocity V0 = 200 m/s
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 6 Work, Energy and Power 28

TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 6 Work, Energy and Power

Question 12.
Find the total energy of a body of 5 kg mass, which is at a height of 10 in from the earth and foiling downwards straightly with a velocity of 20 m/s. (Take the acceleration due to gravity as 10 m/s²) [TS May ’16]
Answer:
Mass m = 5 kg; Height h = 10 m ; g = 10 m/s²
Velocity v = 20 m/s.
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 6 Work, Energy and Power 29